blob: d52914b75331a7bf2a384e10d9ec4a4ce427260a [file] [log] [blame]
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07001/*
Johannes Berg3017b802007-08-28 17:01:53 -04002 * mac80211 <-> driver interface
3 *
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004 * Copyright 2002-2005, Devicescape Software, Inc.
5 * Copyright 2006-2007 Jiri Benc <jbenc@suse.cz>
Jouni Malinen026331c2010-02-15 12:53:10 +02006 * Copyright 2007-2010 Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net>
Johannes Bergd98ad832014-09-03 15:24:57 +03007 * Copyright 2013-2014 Intel Mobile Communications GmbH
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07008 *
9 * This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify
10 * it under the terms of the GNU General Public License version 2 as
11 * published by the Free Software Foundation.
12 */
13
14#ifndef MAC80211_H
15#define MAC80211_H
16
Paul Gortmaker187f1882011-11-23 20:12:59 -050017#include <linux/bug.h>
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -070018#include <linux/kernel.h>
19#include <linux/if_ether.h>
20#include <linux/skbuff.h>
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -070021#include <linux/ieee80211.h>
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -070022#include <net/cfg80211.h>
Johannes Berg42d98792011-07-07 18:58:01 +020023#include <asm/unaligned.h>
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -070024
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -040025/**
26 * DOC: Introduction
27 *
28 * mac80211 is the Linux stack for 802.11 hardware that implements
29 * only partial functionality in hard- or firmware. This document
30 * defines the interface between mac80211 and low-level hardware
31 * drivers.
32 */
33
34/**
35 * DOC: Calling mac80211 from interrupts
36 *
37 * Only ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe() and ieee80211_rx_irqsafe() can be
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -070038 * called in hardware interrupt context. The low-level driver must not call any
39 * other functions in hardware interrupt context. If there is a need for such
40 * call, the low-level driver should first ACK the interrupt and perform the
Johannes Berg2485f712008-02-25 16:27:41 +010041 * IEEE 802.11 code call after this, e.g. from a scheduled workqueue or even
42 * tasklet function.
43 *
44 * NOTE: If the driver opts to use the _irqsafe() functions, it may not also
Randy Dunlap6ef307b2008-07-03 13:52:18 -070045 * use the non-IRQ-safe functions!
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -070046 */
47
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -040048/**
49 * DOC: Warning
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -070050 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -040051 * If you're reading this document and not the header file itself, it will
52 * be incomplete because not all documentation has been converted yet.
53 */
54
55/**
56 * DOC: Frame format
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -070057 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -040058 * As a general rule, when frames are passed between mac80211 and the driver,
59 * they start with the IEEE 802.11 header and include the same octets that are
60 * sent over the air except for the FCS which should be calculated by the
61 * hardware.
62 *
63 * There are, however, various exceptions to this rule for advanced features:
64 *
65 * The first exception is for hardware encryption and decryption offload
66 * where the IV/ICV may or may not be generated in hardware.
67 *
68 * Secondly, when the hardware handles fragmentation, the frame handed to
69 * the driver from mac80211 is the MSDU, not the MPDU.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -070070 */
71
Ron Rindjunsky10816d42007-11-26 16:14:30 +020072/**
Luis R. Rodriguez42935ec2009-07-29 20:08:07 -040073 * DOC: mac80211 workqueue
74 *
75 * mac80211 provides its own workqueue for drivers and internal mac80211 use.
76 * The workqueue is a single threaded workqueue and can only be accessed by
77 * helpers for sanity checking. Drivers must ensure all work added onto the
78 * mac80211 workqueue should be cancelled on the driver stop() callback.
79 *
80 * mac80211 will flushed the workqueue upon interface removal and during
81 * suspend.
82 *
83 * All work performed on the mac80211 workqueue must not acquire the RTNL lock.
84 *
85 */
86
Paul Gortmaker313162d2012-01-30 11:46:54 -050087struct device;
88
Luis R. Rodriguez42935ec2009-07-29 20:08:07 -040089/**
Johannes Berge100bb62008-04-30 18:51:21 +020090 * enum ieee80211_max_queues - maximum number of queues
91 *
92 * @IEEE80211_MAX_QUEUES: Maximum number of regular device queues.
Johannes Berg445ea4e2013-02-13 12:25:28 +010093 * @IEEE80211_MAX_QUEUE_MAP: bitmap with maximum queues set
Johannes Berge100bb62008-04-30 18:51:21 +020094 */
95enum ieee80211_max_queues {
Johannes Berg3a25a8c2012-04-03 16:28:50 +020096 IEEE80211_MAX_QUEUES = 16,
Johannes Berg445ea4e2013-02-13 12:25:28 +010097 IEEE80211_MAX_QUEUE_MAP = BIT(IEEE80211_MAX_QUEUES) - 1,
Johannes Berge100bb62008-04-30 18:51:21 +020098};
99
Johannes Berg3a25a8c2012-04-03 16:28:50 +0200100#define IEEE80211_INVAL_HW_QUEUE 0xff
101
Johannes Berge100bb62008-04-30 18:51:21 +0200102/**
Johannes Berg4bce22b2010-11-16 11:49:58 -0800103 * enum ieee80211_ac_numbers - AC numbers as used in mac80211
104 * @IEEE80211_AC_VO: voice
105 * @IEEE80211_AC_VI: video
106 * @IEEE80211_AC_BE: best effort
107 * @IEEE80211_AC_BK: background
108 */
109enum ieee80211_ac_numbers {
110 IEEE80211_AC_VO = 0,
111 IEEE80211_AC_VI = 1,
112 IEEE80211_AC_BE = 2,
113 IEEE80211_AC_BK = 3,
114};
Johannes Berg948d8872011-09-29 16:04:29 +0200115#define IEEE80211_NUM_ACS 4
Johannes Berg4bce22b2010-11-16 11:49:58 -0800116
117/**
Johannes Berg6b301cd2007-09-18 17:29:20 -0400118 * struct ieee80211_tx_queue_params - transmit queue configuration
119 *
120 * The information provided in this structure is required for QoS
Johannes Berg3330d7b2008-02-10 16:49:38 +0100121 * transmit queue configuration. Cf. IEEE 802.11 7.3.2.29.
Johannes Berg6b301cd2007-09-18 17:29:20 -0400122 *
Bob Copelande37d4df2008-10-20 21:20:27 -0400123 * @aifs: arbitration interframe space [0..255]
Johannes Bergf434b2d2008-07-10 11:22:31 +0200124 * @cw_min: minimum contention window [a value of the form
125 * 2^n-1 in the range 1..32767]
Johannes Berg6b301cd2007-09-18 17:29:20 -0400126 * @cw_max: maximum contention window [like @cw_min]
Johannes Berg3330d7b2008-02-10 16:49:38 +0100127 * @txop: maximum burst time in units of 32 usecs, 0 meaning disabled
Alexander Bondar908f8d02013-04-07 09:53:30 +0300128 * @acm: is mandatory admission control required for the access category
Kalle Valo9d173fc2010-01-14 13:09:14 +0200129 * @uapsd: is U-APSD mode enabled for the queue
Johannes Berg6b301cd2007-09-18 17:29:20 -0400130 */
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -0700131struct ieee80211_tx_queue_params {
Johannes Bergf434b2d2008-07-10 11:22:31 +0200132 u16 txop;
Johannes Berg3330d7b2008-02-10 16:49:38 +0100133 u16 cw_min;
134 u16 cw_max;
Johannes Bergf434b2d2008-07-10 11:22:31 +0200135 u8 aifs;
Alexander Bondar908f8d02013-04-07 09:53:30 +0300136 bool acm;
Kalle Valoab133152010-01-12 10:42:31 +0200137 bool uapsd;
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -0700138};
139
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -0700140struct ieee80211_low_level_stats {
141 unsigned int dot11ACKFailureCount;
142 unsigned int dot11RTSFailureCount;
143 unsigned int dot11FCSErrorCount;
144 unsigned int dot11RTSSuccessCount;
145};
146
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +0100147/**
Michal Kaziord01a1e62012-06-26 14:37:16 +0200148 * enum ieee80211_chanctx_change - change flag for channel context
Johannes Berg4bf88532012-11-09 11:39:59 +0100149 * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_WIDTH: The channel width changed
Johannes Berg04ecd252012-09-11 14:34:12 +0200150 * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_RX_CHAINS: The number of RX chains changed
Simon Wunderlich164eb022013-02-08 18:16:20 +0100151 * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_RADAR: radar detection flag changed
Simon Wunderlich73da7d52013-07-11 16:09:06 +0200152 * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_CHANNEL: switched to another operating channel,
153 * this is used only with channel switching with CSA
Eliad Peller21f659b2013-11-11 20:14:01 +0200154 * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_MIN_WIDTH: The min required channel width changed
Michal Kaziord01a1e62012-06-26 14:37:16 +0200155 */
156enum ieee80211_chanctx_change {
Johannes Berg4bf88532012-11-09 11:39:59 +0100157 IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_WIDTH = BIT(0),
Johannes Berg04ecd252012-09-11 14:34:12 +0200158 IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_RX_CHAINS = BIT(1),
Simon Wunderlich164eb022013-02-08 18:16:20 +0100159 IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_RADAR = BIT(2),
Simon Wunderlich73da7d52013-07-11 16:09:06 +0200160 IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_CHANNEL = BIT(3),
Eliad Peller21f659b2013-11-11 20:14:01 +0200161 IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_MIN_WIDTH = BIT(4),
Michal Kaziord01a1e62012-06-26 14:37:16 +0200162};
163
164/**
165 * struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf - channel context that vifs may be tuned to
166 *
167 * This is the driver-visible part. The ieee80211_chanctx
168 * that contains it is visible in mac80211 only.
169 *
Johannes Berg4bf88532012-11-09 11:39:59 +0100170 * @def: the channel definition
Eliad Peller21f659b2013-11-11 20:14:01 +0200171 * @min_def: the minimum channel definition currently required.
Johannes Berg04ecd252012-09-11 14:34:12 +0200172 * @rx_chains_static: The number of RX chains that must always be
173 * active on the channel to receive MIMO transmissions
174 * @rx_chains_dynamic: The number of RX chains that must be enabled
175 * after RTS/CTS handshake to receive SMPS MIMO transmissions;
Simon Wunderlich5d7fad42012-11-30 19:17:28 +0100176 * this will always be >= @rx_chains_static.
Simon Wunderlich164eb022013-02-08 18:16:20 +0100177 * @radar_enabled: whether radar detection is enabled on this channel.
Michal Kaziord01a1e62012-06-26 14:37:16 +0200178 * @drv_priv: data area for driver use, will always be aligned to
179 * sizeof(void *), size is determined in hw information.
180 */
181struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf {
Johannes Berg4bf88532012-11-09 11:39:59 +0100182 struct cfg80211_chan_def def;
Eliad Peller21f659b2013-11-11 20:14:01 +0200183 struct cfg80211_chan_def min_def;
Michal Kaziord01a1e62012-06-26 14:37:16 +0200184
Johannes Berg04ecd252012-09-11 14:34:12 +0200185 u8 rx_chains_static, rx_chains_dynamic;
186
Simon Wunderlich164eb022013-02-08 18:16:20 +0100187 bool radar_enabled;
188
Johannes Berg1c06ef92012-12-28 12:22:02 +0100189 u8 drv_priv[0] __aligned(sizeof(void *));
Michal Kaziord01a1e62012-06-26 14:37:16 +0200190};
191
192/**
Luciano Coelho1a5f0c12014-05-23 14:33:12 +0300193 * enum ieee80211_chanctx_switch_mode - channel context switch mode
194 * @CHANCTX_SWMODE_REASSIGN_VIF: Both old and new contexts already
195 * exist (and will continue to exist), but the virtual interface
196 * needs to be switched from one to the other.
197 * @CHANCTX_SWMODE_SWAP_CONTEXTS: The old context exists but will stop
198 * to exist with this call, the new context doesn't exist but
199 * will be active after this call, the virtual interface switches
200 * from the old to the new (note that the driver may of course
201 * implement this as an on-the-fly chandef switch of the existing
202 * hardware context, but the mac80211 pointer for the old context
203 * will cease to exist and only the new one will later be used
204 * for changes/removal.)
205 */
206enum ieee80211_chanctx_switch_mode {
207 CHANCTX_SWMODE_REASSIGN_VIF,
208 CHANCTX_SWMODE_SWAP_CONTEXTS,
209};
210
211/**
212 * struct ieee80211_vif_chanctx_switch - vif chanctx switch information
213 *
214 * This is structure is used to pass information about a vif that
215 * needs to switch from one chanctx to another. The
216 * &ieee80211_chanctx_switch_mode defines how the switch should be
217 * done.
218 *
219 * @vif: the vif that should be switched from old_ctx to new_ctx
220 * @old_ctx: the old context to which the vif was assigned
221 * @new_ctx: the new context to which the vif must be assigned
222 */
223struct ieee80211_vif_chanctx_switch {
224 struct ieee80211_vif *vif;
225 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *old_ctx;
226 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *new_ctx;
227};
228
229/**
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +0100230 * enum ieee80211_bss_change - BSS change notification flags
231 *
232 * These flags are used with the bss_info_changed() callback
233 * to indicate which BSS parameter changed.
234 *
235 * @BSS_CHANGED_ASSOC: association status changed (associated/disassociated),
236 * also implies a change in the AID.
237 * @BSS_CHANGED_ERP_CTS_PROT: CTS protection changed
238 * @BSS_CHANGED_ERP_PREAMBLE: preamble changed
Jouni Malinen9f1ba902008-08-07 20:07:01 +0300239 * @BSS_CHANGED_ERP_SLOT: slot timing changed
Tomas Winkler38668c02008-03-28 16:33:32 -0700240 * @BSS_CHANGED_HT: 802.11n parameters changed
Johannes Berg96dd22a2008-09-11 00:01:57 +0200241 * @BSS_CHANGED_BASIC_RATES: Basic rateset changed
Johannes Berg57c4d7b2009-04-23 16:10:04 +0200242 * @BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_INT: Beacon interval changed
Johannes Berg2d0ddec2009-04-23 16:13:26 +0200243 * @BSS_CHANGED_BSSID: BSSID changed, for whatever
244 * reason (IBSS and managed mode)
245 * @BSS_CHANGED_BEACON: Beacon data changed, retrieve
246 * new beacon (beaconing modes)
247 * @BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_ENABLED: Beaconing should be
248 * enabled/disabled (beaconing modes)
Juuso Oikarinena97c13c2010-03-23 09:02:34 +0200249 * @BSS_CHANGED_CQM: Connection quality monitor config changed
Johannes Berg8fc214b2010-04-28 17:40:43 +0200250 * @BSS_CHANGED_IBSS: IBSS join status changed
Juuso Oikarinen68542962010-06-09 13:43:26 +0300251 * @BSS_CHANGED_ARP_FILTER: Hardware ARP filter address list or state changed.
Johannes Berg4ced3f72010-07-19 16:39:04 +0200252 * @BSS_CHANGED_QOS: QoS for this association was enabled/disabled. Note
253 * that it is only ever disabled for station mode.
Johannes Berg7da7cc12010-08-05 17:02:38 +0200254 * @BSS_CHANGED_IDLE: Idle changed for this BSS/interface.
Marek Puzyniak0ca54f62013-04-10 13:19:13 +0200255 * @BSS_CHANGED_SSID: SSID changed for this BSS (AP and IBSS mode)
Arik Nemtsov02945822011-11-10 11:28:57 +0200256 * @BSS_CHANGED_AP_PROBE_RESP: Probe Response changed for this BSS (AP mode)
Eliad Pellerab095872012-07-27 12:33:22 +0300257 * @BSS_CHANGED_PS: PS changed for this BSS (STA mode)
Johannes Berg1ea6f9c2012-10-24 10:59:25 +0200258 * @BSS_CHANGED_TXPOWER: TX power setting changed for this interface
Johannes Berg488dd7b2012-10-29 20:08:01 +0100259 * @BSS_CHANGED_P2P_PS: P2P powersave settings (CTWindow, opportunistic PS)
260 * changed (currently only in P2P client mode, GO mode will be later)
Alexander Bondar989c6502013-05-16 17:34:17 +0300261 * @BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_INFO: Data from the AP's beacon became available:
262 * currently dtim_period only is under consideration.
Johannes Berg2c9b7352013-02-07 21:37:29 +0100263 * @BSS_CHANGED_BANDWIDTH: The bandwidth used by this interface changed,
264 * note that this is only called when it changes after the channel
265 * context had been assigned.
Rostislav Lisovy239281f2014-11-03 10:33:19 +0100266 * @BSS_CHANGED_OCB: OCB join status changed
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +0100267 */
268enum ieee80211_bss_change {
269 BSS_CHANGED_ASSOC = 1<<0,
270 BSS_CHANGED_ERP_CTS_PROT = 1<<1,
271 BSS_CHANGED_ERP_PREAMBLE = 1<<2,
Jouni Malinen9f1ba902008-08-07 20:07:01 +0300272 BSS_CHANGED_ERP_SLOT = 1<<3,
Alexander Simona7ce1c92011-09-18 00:16:45 +0200273 BSS_CHANGED_HT = 1<<4,
Johannes Berg96dd22a2008-09-11 00:01:57 +0200274 BSS_CHANGED_BASIC_RATES = 1<<5,
Johannes Berg57c4d7b2009-04-23 16:10:04 +0200275 BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_INT = 1<<6,
Johannes Berg2d0ddec2009-04-23 16:13:26 +0200276 BSS_CHANGED_BSSID = 1<<7,
277 BSS_CHANGED_BEACON = 1<<8,
278 BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_ENABLED = 1<<9,
Juuso Oikarinena97c13c2010-03-23 09:02:34 +0200279 BSS_CHANGED_CQM = 1<<10,
Johannes Berg8fc214b2010-04-28 17:40:43 +0200280 BSS_CHANGED_IBSS = 1<<11,
Juuso Oikarinen68542962010-06-09 13:43:26 +0300281 BSS_CHANGED_ARP_FILTER = 1<<12,
Johannes Berg4ced3f72010-07-19 16:39:04 +0200282 BSS_CHANGED_QOS = 1<<13,
Johannes Berg7da7cc12010-08-05 17:02:38 +0200283 BSS_CHANGED_IDLE = 1<<14,
Arik Nemtsov78274932011-09-04 11:11:32 +0300284 BSS_CHANGED_SSID = 1<<15,
Arik Nemtsov02945822011-11-10 11:28:57 +0200285 BSS_CHANGED_AP_PROBE_RESP = 1<<16,
Eliad Pellerab095872012-07-27 12:33:22 +0300286 BSS_CHANGED_PS = 1<<17,
Johannes Berg1ea6f9c2012-10-24 10:59:25 +0200287 BSS_CHANGED_TXPOWER = 1<<18,
Johannes Berg488dd7b2012-10-29 20:08:01 +0100288 BSS_CHANGED_P2P_PS = 1<<19,
Alexander Bondar989c6502013-05-16 17:34:17 +0300289 BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_INFO = 1<<20,
Johannes Berg2c9b7352013-02-07 21:37:29 +0100290 BSS_CHANGED_BANDWIDTH = 1<<21,
Rostislav Lisovy239281f2014-11-03 10:33:19 +0100291 BSS_CHANGED_OCB = 1<<22,
Johannes Bergac8dd502010-05-05 09:44:02 +0200292
293 /* when adding here, make sure to change ieee80211_reconfig */
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +0100294};
295
Juuso Oikarinen68542962010-06-09 13:43:26 +0300296/*
297 * The maximum number of IPv4 addresses listed for ARP filtering. If the number
298 * of addresses for an interface increase beyond this value, hardware ARP
299 * filtering will be disabled.
300 */
301#define IEEE80211_BSS_ARP_ADDR_LIST_LEN 4
302
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +0100303/**
Meenakshi Venkataraman615f7b92011-07-08 08:46:22 -0700304 * enum ieee80211_rssi_event - RSSI threshold event
305 * An indicator for when RSSI goes below/above a certain threshold.
306 * @RSSI_EVENT_HIGH: AP's rssi crossed the high threshold set by the driver.
307 * @RSSI_EVENT_LOW: AP's rssi crossed the low threshold set by the driver.
308 */
309enum ieee80211_rssi_event {
310 RSSI_EVENT_HIGH,
311 RSSI_EVENT_LOW,
312};
313
314/**
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +0100315 * struct ieee80211_bss_conf - holds the BSS's changing parameters
316 *
317 * This structure keeps information about a BSS (and an association
318 * to that BSS) that can change during the lifetime of the BSS.
319 *
320 * @assoc: association status
Johannes Berg8fc214b2010-04-28 17:40:43 +0200321 * @ibss_joined: indicates whether this station is part of an IBSS
322 * or not
Sujith Manoharanc13a7652012-10-12 17:35:45 +0530323 * @ibss_creator: indicates if a new IBSS network is being created
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +0100324 * @aid: association ID number, valid only when @assoc is true
325 * @use_cts_prot: use CTS protection
Johannes Berg7a5158e2008-10-08 10:59:33 +0200326 * @use_short_preamble: use 802.11b short preamble;
327 * if the hardware cannot handle this it must set the
328 * IEEE80211_HW_2GHZ_SHORT_PREAMBLE_INCAPABLE hardware flag
329 * @use_short_slot: use short slot time (only relevant for ERP);
330 * if the hardware cannot handle this it must set the
331 * IEEE80211_HW_2GHZ_SHORT_SLOT_INCAPABLE hardware flag
Johannes Berg56007a02010-01-26 14:19:52 +0100332 * @dtim_period: num of beacons before the next DTIM, for beaconing,
Emmanuel Grumbachc65dd142012-12-12 10:12:24 +0200333 * valid in station mode only if after the driver was notified
Alexander Bondar989c6502013-05-16 17:34:17 +0300334 * with the %BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_INFO flag, will be non-zero then.
Johannes Berg8c358bc2012-05-22 22:13:05 +0200335 * @sync_tsf: last beacon's/probe response's TSF timestamp (could be old
Johannes Bergef429da2013-02-05 17:48:40 +0100336 * as it may have been received during scanning long ago). If the
337 * HW flag %IEEE80211_HW_TIMING_BEACON_ONLY is set, then this can
338 * only come from a beacon, but might not become valid until after
339 * association when a beacon is received (which is notified with the
340 * %BSS_CHANGED_DTIM flag.)
Johannes Berg8c358bc2012-05-22 22:13:05 +0200341 * @sync_device_ts: the device timestamp corresponding to the sync_tsf,
342 * the driver/device can use this to calculate synchronisation
Johannes Bergef429da2013-02-05 17:48:40 +0100343 * (see @sync_tsf)
344 * @sync_dtim_count: Only valid when %IEEE80211_HW_TIMING_BEACON_ONLY
345 * is requested, see @sync_tsf/@sync_device_ts.
Tomas Winkler21c0cbe2008-03-28 16:33:34 -0700346 * @beacon_int: beacon interval
Emmanuel Grumbach98f7dfd2008-07-18 13:52:59 +0800347 * @assoc_capability: capabilities taken from assoc resp
Johannes Berg96dd22a2008-09-11 00:01:57 +0200348 * @basic_rates: bitmap of basic rates, each bit stands for an
349 * index into the rate table configured by the driver in
350 * the current band.
Alexander Bondar817cee72013-05-19 14:23:57 +0300351 * @beacon_rate: associated AP's beacon TX rate
Felix Fietkaudd5b4cc2010-11-22 20:58:24 +0100352 * @mcast_rate: per-band multicast rate index + 1 (0: disabled)
Johannes Berg2d0ddec2009-04-23 16:13:26 +0200353 * @bssid: The BSSID for this BSS
354 * @enable_beacon: whether beaconing should be enabled or not
Johannes Berg4bf88532012-11-09 11:39:59 +0100355 * @chandef: Channel definition for this BSS -- the hardware might be
356 * configured a higher bandwidth than this BSS uses, for example.
Johannes Berg074d46d2012-03-15 19:45:16 +0100357 * @ht_operation_mode: HT operation mode like in &struct ieee80211_ht_operation.
Johannes Berg9ed6bcc2009-05-08 20:47:39 +0200358 * This field is only valid when the channel type is one of the HT types.
Juuso Oikarinena97c13c2010-03-23 09:02:34 +0200359 * @cqm_rssi_thold: Connection quality monitor RSSI threshold, a zero value
360 * implies disabled
361 * @cqm_rssi_hyst: Connection quality monitor RSSI hysteresis
Juuso Oikarinen68542962010-06-09 13:43:26 +0300362 * @arp_addr_list: List of IPv4 addresses for hardware ARP filtering. The
363 * may filter ARP queries targeted for other addresses than listed here.
364 * The driver must allow ARP queries targeted for all address listed here
365 * to pass through. An empty list implies no ARP queries need to pass.
Johannes Berg0f19b412013-01-14 16:39:07 +0100366 * @arp_addr_cnt: Number of addresses currently on the list. Note that this
367 * may be larger than %IEEE80211_BSS_ARP_ADDR_LIST_LEN (the arp_addr_list
368 * array size), it's up to the driver what to do in that case.
Johannes Berg4ced3f72010-07-19 16:39:04 +0200369 * @qos: This is a QoS-enabled BSS.
Johannes Berg7da7cc12010-08-05 17:02:38 +0200370 * @idle: This interface is idle. There's also a global idle flag in the
371 * hardware config which may be more appropriate depending on what
372 * your driver/device needs to do.
Eliad Pellerab095872012-07-27 12:33:22 +0300373 * @ps: power-save mode (STA only). This flag is NOT affected by
374 * offchannel/dynamic_ps operations.
Marek Puzyniak0ca54f62013-04-10 13:19:13 +0200375 * @ssid: The SSID of the current vif. Valid in AP and IBSS mode.
Arik Nemtsov78274932011-09-04 11:11:32 +0300376 * @ssid_len: Length of SSID given in @ssid.
377 * @hidden_ssid: The SSID of the current vif is hidden. Only valid in AP-mode.
Johannes Berg1ea6f9c2012-10-24 10:59:25 +0200378 * @txpower: TX power in dBm
Lorenzo Bianconidb82d8a2015-01-14 12:55:08 +0100379 * @txpower_type: TX power adjustment used to control per packet Transmit
380 * Power Control (TPC) in lower driver for the current vif. In particular
381 * TPC is enabled if value passed in %txpower_type is
382 * NL80211_TX_POWER_LIMITED (allow using less than specified from
383 * userspace), whereas TPC is disabled if %txpower_type is set to
384 * NL80211_TX_POWER_FIXED (use value configured from userspace)
Janusz Dziedzic67baf662013-03-21 15:47:56 +0100385 * @p2p_noa_attr: P2P NoA attribute for P2P powersave
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +0100386 */
387struct ieee80211_bss_conf {
Johannes Berg2d0ddec2009-04-23 16:13:26 +0200388 const u8 *bssid;
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +0100389 /* association related data */
Johannes Berg8fc214b2010-04-28 17:40:43 +0200390 bool assoc, ibss_joined;
Sujith Manoharanc13a7652012-10-12 17:35:45 +0530391 bool ibss_creator;
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +0100392 u16 aid;
393 /* erp related data */
394 bool use_cts_prot;
395 bool use_short_preamble;
Jouni Malinen9f1ba902008-08-07 20:07:01 +0300396 bool use_short_slot;
Johannes Berg2d0ddec2009-04-23 16:13:26 +0200397 bool enable_beacon;
Emmanuel Grumbach98f7dfd2008-07-18 13:52:59 +0800398 u8 dtim_period;
Tomas Winkler21c0cbe2008-03-28 16:33:34 -0700399 u16 beacon_int;
400 u16 assoc_capability;
Johannes Berg8c358bc2012-05-22 22:13:05 +0200401 u64 sync_tsf;
402 u32 sync_device_ts;
Johannes Bergef429da2013-02-05 17:48:40 +0100403 u8 sync_dtim_count;
Johannes Berg881d9482009-01-21 15:13:48 +0100404 u32 basic_rates;
Alexander Bondar817cee72013-05-19 14:23:57 +0300405 struct ieee80211_rate *beacon_rate;
Felix Fietkaudd5b4cc2010-11-22 20:58:24 +0100406 int mcast_rate[IEEE80211_NUM_BANDS];
Johannes Berg9ed6bcc2009-05-08 20:47:39 +0200407 u16 ht_operation_mode;
Juuso Oikarinena97c13c2010-03-23 09:02:34 +0200408 s32 cqm_rssi_thold;
409 u32 cqm_rssi_hyst;
Johannes Berg4bf88532012-11-09 11:39:59 +0100410 struct cfg80211_chan_def chandef;
Juuso Oikarinen68542962010-06-09 13:43:26 +0300411 __be32 arp_addr_list[IEEE80211_BSS_ARP_ADDR_LIST_LEN];
Johannes Berg0f19b412013-01-14 16:39:07 +0100412 int arp_addr_cnt;
Johannes Berg4ced3f72010-07-19 16:39:04 +0200413 bool qos;
Johannes Berg7da7cc12010-08-05 17:02:38 +0200414 bool idle;
Eliad Pellerab095872012-07-27 12:33:22 +0300415 bool ps;
Arik Nemtsov78274932011-09-04 11:11:32 +0300416 u8 ssid[IEEE80211_MAX_SSID_LEN];
417 size_t ssid_len;
418 bool hidden_ssid;
Johannes Berg1ea6f9c2012-10-24 10:59:25 +0200419 int txpower;
Lorenzo Bianconidb82d8a2015-01-14 12:55:08 +0100420 enum nl80211_tx_power_setting txpower_type;
Janusz Dziedzic67baf662013-03-21 15:47:56 +0100421 struct ieee80211_p2p_noa_attr p2p_noa_attr;
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +0100422};
423
Ron Rindjunsky11f4b1c2008-03-04 18:09:26 -0800424/**
Johannes Bergaf61a162013-07-02 18:09:12 +0200425 * enum mac80211_tx_info_flags - flags to describe transmission information/status
Ron Rindjunsky11f4b1c2008-03-04 18:09:26 -0800426 *
Randy Dunlap6ef307b2008-07-03 13:52:18 -0700427 * These flags are used with the @flags member of &ieee80211_tx_info.
Ron Rindjunsky11f4b1c2008-03-04 18:09:26 -0800428 *
Johannes Berg7351c6b2009-11-19 01:08:30 +0100429 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_REQ_TX_STATUS: require TX status callback for this frame.
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200430 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_ASSIGN_SEQ: The driver has to assign a sequence
431 * number to this frame, taking care of not overwriting the fragment
432 * number and increasing the sequence number only when the
433 * IEEE80211_TX_CTL_FIRST_FRAGMENT flag is set. mac80211 will properly
434 * assign sequence numbers to QoS-data frames but cannot do so correctly
435 * for non-QoS-data and management frames because beacons need them from
436 * that counter as well and mac80211 cannot guarantee proper sequencing.
437 * If this flag is set, the driver should instruct the hardware to
438 * assign a sequence number to the frame or assign one itself. Cf. IEEE
439 * 802.11-2007 7.1.3.4.1 paragraph 3. This flag will always be set for
440 * beacons and always be clear for frames without a sequence number field.
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200441 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_ACK: tell the low level not to wait for an ack
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200442 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_CLEAR_PS_FILT: clear powersave filter for destination
443 * station
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200444 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_FIRST_FRAGMENT: this is a first fragment of the frame
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200445 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_SEND_AFTER_DTIM: send this frame after DTIM beacon
446 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_AMPDU: this frame should be sent as part of an A-MPDU
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200447 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_INJECTED: Frame was injected, internal to mac80211.
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200448 * @IEEE80211_TX_STAT_TX_FILTERED: The frame was not transmitted
Johannes Bergab5b5342009-08-07 16:28:09 +0200449 * because the destination STA was in powersave mode. Note that to
450 * avoid race conditions, the filter must be set by the hardware or
451 * firmware upon receiving a frame that indicates that the station
452 * went to sleep (must be done on device to filter frames already on
453 * the queue) and may only be unset after mac80211 gives the OK for
454 * that by setting the IEEE80211_TX_CTL_CLEAR_PS_FILT (see above),
455 * since only then is it guaranteed that no more frames are in the
456 * hardware queue.
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200457 * @IEEE80211_TX_STAT_ACK: Frame was acknowledged
458 * @IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU: The frame was aggregated, so status
459 * is for the whole aggregation.
Ron Rindjunsky429a3802008-07-01 14:16:03 +0300460 * @IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU_NO_BACK: no block ack was returned,
461 * so consider using block ack request (BAR).
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200462 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_RATE_CTRL_PROBE: internal to mac80211, can be
463 * set by rate control algorithms to indicate probe rate, will
464 * be cleared for fragmented frames (except on the last fragment)
Seth Forshee6c17b772013-02-11 11:21:07 -0600465 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_OFFCHAN_TX_OK: Internal to mac80211. Used to indicate
466 * that a frame can be transmitted while the queues are stopped for
467 * off-channel operation.
Johannes Bergcd8ffc82009-03-23 17:28:41 +0100468 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_NEED_TXPROCESSING: completely internal to mac80211,
469 * used to indicate that a pending frame requires TX processing before
470 * it can be sent out.
Johannes Berg8f77f382009-06-07 21:58:37 +0200471 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_RETRIED: completely internal to mac80211,
472 * used to indicate that a frame was already retried due to PS
Johannes Berg3b8d81e02009-06-17 17:43:56 +0200473 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_DONT_ENCRYPT: completely internal to mac80211,
474 * used to indicate frame should not be encrypted
Johannes Berg02f2f1a2012-02-27 12:18:30 +0100475 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER: This frame is a response to a poll
476 * frame (PS-Poll or uAPSD) or a non-bufferable MMPDU and must
477 * be sent although the station is in powersave mode.
Johannes Bergad5351d2009-08-07 16:42:15 +0200478 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_MORE_FRAMES: More frames will be passed to the
479 * transmit function after the current frame, this can be used
480 * by drivers to kick the DMA queue only if unset or when the
481 * queue gets full.
Johannes Bergc6fcf6b2010-01-17 01:47:59 +0100482 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_RETRANSMISSION: This frame is being retransmitted
483 * after TX status because the destination was asleep, it must not
484 * be modified again (no seqno assignment, crypto, etc.)
Johannes Berg1672c0e32013-01-29 15:02:27 +0100485 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_MLME_CONN_TX: This frame was transmitted by the MLME
486 * code for connection establishment, this indicates that its status
487 * should kick the MLME state machine.
Jouni Malinen026331c2010-02-15 12:53:10 +0200488 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_NL80211_FRAME_TX: Frame was requested through nl80211
489 * MLME command (internal to mac80211 to figure out whether to send TX
490 * status to user space)
Luis R. Rodriguez0a56bd02010-04-15 17:39:37 -0400491 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_LDPC: tells the driver to use LDPC for this frame
Felix Fietkauf79d9ba2010-04-19 19:57:35 +0200492 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_STBC: Enables Space-Time Block Coding (STBC) for this
493 * frame and selects the maximum number of streams that it can use.
Johannes Berg610dbc92011-01-06 22:36:44 +0100494 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_TX_OFFCHAN: Marks this packet to be transmitted on
495 * the off-channel channel when a remain-on-channel offload is done
496 * in hardware -- normal packets still flow and are expected to be
497 * handled properly by the device.
Jouni Malinen681d1192011-02-03 18:35:19 +0200498 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_TKIP_MIC_FAILURE: Marks this packet to be used for TKIP
499 * testing. It will be sent out with incorrect Michael MIC key to allow
500 * TKIP countermeasures to be tested.
Rajkumar Manoharanaad14ce2011-09-25 14:53:31 +0530501 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_CCK_RATE: This frame will be sent at non CCK rate.
502 * This flag is actually used for management frame especially for P2P
503 * frames not being sent at CCK rate in 2GHz band.
Johannes Berg47086fc2011-09-29 16:04:33 +0200504 * @IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP: This packet marks the end of service period,
505 * when its status is reported the service period ends. For frames in
506 * an SP that mac80211 transmits, it is already set; for driver frames
Johannes Bergdeeaee12011-09-29 16:04:35 +0200507 * the driver may set this flag. It is also used to do the same for
508 * PS-Poll responses.
Rajkumar Manoharanb6f35302011-09-29 20:34:04 +0530509 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_USE_MINRATE: This frame will be sent at lowest rate.
510 * This flag is used to send nullfunc frame at minimum rate when
511 * the nullfunc is used for connection monitoring purpose.
Johannes Berga26eb272011-10-07 14:01:25 +0200512 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_DONTFRAG: Don't fragment this packet even if it
513 * would be fragmented by size (this is optional, only used for
514 * monitor injection).
Sujith Manoharan5cf16612014-12-10 21:26:11 +0530515 * @IEEE80211_TX_STAT_NOACK_TRANSMITTED: A frame that was marked with
516 * IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_ACK has been successfully transmitted without
517 * any errors (like issues specific to the driver/HW).
518 * This flag must not be set for frames that don't request no-ack
519 * behaviour with IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_ACK.
Christian Lampartereb7d3062010-09-21 21:36:18 +0200520 *
521 * Note: If you have to add new flags to the enumeration, then don't
522 * forget to update %IEEE80211_TX_TEMPORARY_FLAGS when necessary.
Ron Rindjunsky11f4b1c2008-03-04 18:09:26 -0800523 */
Johannes Bergaf61a162013-07-02 18:09:12 +0200524enum mac80211_tx_info_flags {
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200525 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_REQ_TX_STATUS = BIT(0),
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200526 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_ASSIGN_SEQ = BIT(1),
527 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_ACK = BIT(2),
528 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_CLEAR_PS_FILT = BIT(3),
529 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_FIRST_FRAGMENT = BIT(4),
530 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_SEND_AFTER_DTIM = BIT(5),
531 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_AMPDU = BIT(6),
532 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_INJECTED = BIT(7),
533 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_TX_FILTERED = BIT(8),
534 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_ACK = BIT(9),
535 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU = BIT(10),
536 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU_NO_BACK = BIT(11),
537 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_RATE_CTRL_PROBE = BIT(12),
Seth Forshee6c17b772013-02-11 11:21:07 -0600538 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_OFFCHAN_TX_OK = BIT(13),
Johannes Bergcd8ffc82009-03-23 17:28:41 +0100539 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_NEED_TXPROCESSING = BIT(14),
Johannes Berg8f77f382009-06-07 21:58:37 +0200540 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_RETRIED = BIT(15),
Johannes Berg3b8d81e02009-06-17 17:43:56 +0200541 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_DONT_ENCRYPT = BIT(16),
Johannes Berg02f2f1a2012-02-27 12:18:30 +0100542 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER = BIT(17),
Johannes Bergad5351d2009-08-07 16:42:15 +0200543 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_MORE_FRAMES = BIT(18),
Johannes Bergc6fcf6b2010-01-17 01:47:59 +0100544 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_RETRANSMISSION = BIT(19),
Johannes Berg1672c0e32013-01-29 15:02:27 +0100545 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_MLME_CONN_TX = BIT(20),
Jouni Malinen026331c2010-02-15 12:53:10 +0200546 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_NL80211_FRAME_TX = BIT(21),
Luis R. Rodriguez0a56bd02010-04-15 17:39:37 -0400547 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_LDPC = BIT(22),
Felix Fietkauf79d9ba2010-04-19 19:57:35 +0200548 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_STBC = BIT(23) | BIT(24),
Johannes Berg21f83582010-12-18 17:20:47 +0100549 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_TX_OFFCHAN = BIT(25),
Jouni Malinen681d1192011-02-03 18:35:19 +0200550 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_TKIP_MIC_FAILURE = BIT(26),
Rajkumar Manoharanaad14ce2011-09-25 14:53:31 +0530551 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_CCK_RATE = BIT(27),
Johannes Berg47086fc2011-09-29 16:04:33 +0200552 IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP = BIT(28),
Rajkumar Manoharanb6f35302011-09-29 20:34:04 +0530553 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_USE_MINRATE = BIT(29),
Johannes Berga26eb272011-10-07 14:01:25 +0200554 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_DONTFRAG = BIT(30),
Sujith Manoharan5cf16612014-12-10 21:26:11 +0530555 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_NOACK_TRANSMITTED = BIT(31),
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200556};
557
Johannes Bergabe37c42010-06-07 11:12:27 +0200558#define IEEE80211_TX_CTL_STBC_SHIFT 23
559
Johannes Bergaf61a162013-07-02 18:09:12 +0200560/**
561 * enum mac80211_tx_control_flags - flags to describe transmit control
562 *
563 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_PORT_CTRL_PROTO: this frame is a port control
564 * protocol frame (e.g. EAP)
Sujith Manoharan6b127c72014-12-10 21:26:10 +0530565 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_PS_RESPONSE: This frame is a response to a poll
566 * frame (PS-Poll or uAPSD).
Johannes Bergaf61a162013-07-02 18:09:12 +0200567 *
568 * These flags are used in tx_info->control.flags.
569 */
570enum mac80211_tx_control_flags {
571 IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_PORT_CTRL_PROTO = BIT(0),
Sujith Manoharan6b127c72014-12-10 21:26:10 +0530572 IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_PS_RESPONSE = BIT(1),
Johannes Bergaf61a162013-07-02 18:09:12 +0200573};
574
Christian Lampartereb7d3062010-09-21 21:36:18 +0200575/*
576 * This definition is used as a mask to clear all temporary flags, which are
577 * set by the tx handlers for each transmission attempt by the mac80211 stack.
578 */
579#define IEEE80211_TX_TEMPORARY_FLAGS (IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_ACK | \
580 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_CLEAR_PS_FILT | IEEE80211_TX_CTL_FIRST_FRAGMENT | \
581 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_SEND_AFTER_DTIM | IEEE80211_TX_CTL_AMPDU | \
582 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_TX_FILTERED | IEEE80211_TX_STAT_ACK | \
583 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU | IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU_NO_BACK | \
Johannes Berg02f2f1a2012-02-27 12:18:30 +0100584 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_RATE_CTRL_PROBE | IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER | \
Christian Lampartereb7d3062010-09-21 21:36:18 +0200585 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_MORE_FRAMES | IEEE80211_TX_CTL_LDPC | \
Johannes Berg47086fc2011-09-29 16:04:33 +0200586 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_STBC | IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP)
Christian Lampartereb7d3062010-09-21 21:36:18 +0200587
Sujith2134e7e2009-01-22 09:00:52 +0530588/**
589 * enum mac80211_rate_control_flags - per-rate flags set by the
590 * Rate Control algorithm.
591 *
592 * These flags are set by the Rate control algorithm for each rate during tx,
593 * in the @flags member of struct ieee80211_tx_rate.
594 *
595 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_RTS_CTS: Use RTS/CTS exchange for this rate.
596 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_CTS_PROTECT: CTS-to-self protection is required.
597 * This is set if the current BSS requires ERP protection.
598 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_SHORT_PREAMBLE: Use short preamble.
599 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_MCS: HT rate.
Johannes Berg8bc83c22012-11-09 18:38:32 +0100600 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_VHT_MCS: VHT MCS rate, in this case the idx field is split
601 * into a higher 4 bits (Nss) and lower 4 bits (MCS number)
Sujith2134e7e2009-01-22 09:00:52 +0530602 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_GREEN_FIELD: Indicates whether this rate should be used in
603 * Greenfield mode.
604 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_40_MHZ_WIDTH: Indicates if the Channel Width should be 40 MHz.
Johannes Berg8bc83c22012-11-09 18:38:32 +0100605 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_80_MHZ_WIDTH: Indicates 80 MHz transmission
606 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_160_MHZ_WIDTH: Indicates 160 MHz transmission
607 * (80+80 isn't supported yet)
Sujith2134e7e2009-01-22 09:00:52 +0530608 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_DUP_DATA: The frame should be transmitted on both of the
609 * adjacent 20 MHz channels, if the current channel type is
610 * NL80211_CHAN_HT40MINUS or NL80211_CHAN_HT40PLUS.
611 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_SHORT_GI: Short Guard interval should be used for this rate.
612 */
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200613enum mac80211_rate_control_flags {
614 IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_RTS_CTS = BIT(0),
615 IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_CTS_PROTECT = BIT(1),
616 IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_SHORT_PREAMBLE = BIT(2),
617
Johannes Berg8bc83c22012-11-09 18:38:32 +0100618 /* rate index is an HT/VHT MCS instead of an index */
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200619 IEEE80211_TX_RC_MCS = BIT(3),
620 IEEE80211_TX_RC_GREEN_FIELD = BIT(4),
621 IEEE80211_TX_RC_40_MHZ_WIDTH = BIT(5),
622 IEEE80211_TX_RC_DUP_DATA = BIT(6),
623 IEEE80211_TX_RC_SHORT_GI = BIT(7),
Johannes Berg8bc83c22012-11-09 18:38:32 +0100624 IEEE80211_TX_RC_VHT_MCS = BIT(8),
625 IEEE80211_TX_RC_80_MHZ_WIDTH = BIT(9),
626 IEEE80211_TX_RC_160_MHZ_WIDTH = BIT(10),
Ron Rindjunsky11f4b1c2008-03-04 18:09:26 -0800627};
628
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200629
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200630/* there are 40 bytes if you don't need the rateset to be kept */
631#define IEEE80211_TX_INFO_DRIVER_DATA_SIZE 40
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200632
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200633/* if you do need the rateset, then you have less space */
634#define IEEE80211_TX_INFO_RATE_DRIVER_DATA_SIZE 24
635
636/* maximum number of rate stages */
Thomas Huehne3e1a0b2012-07-02 19:46:16 +0200637#define IEEE80211_TX_MAX_RATES 4
Felix Fietkau870abdf2008-10-05 18:04:24 +0200638
Felix Fietkau0d528d82013-04-22 16:14:41 +0200639/* maximum number of rate table entries */
640#define IEEE80211_TX_RATE_TABLE_SIZE 4
641
Felix Fietkau870abdf2008-10-05 18:04:24 +0200642/**
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200643 * struct ieee80211_tx_rate - rate selection/status
Felix Fietkau870abdf2008-10-05 18:04:24 +0200644 *
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200645 * @idx: rate index to attempt to send with
646 * @flags: rate control flags (&enum mac80211_rate_control_flags)
Johannes Berge25cf4a2008-10-23 08:51:20 +0200647 * @count: number of tries in this rate before going to the next rate
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200648 *
649 * A value of -1 for @idx indicates an invalid rate and, if used
650 * in an array of retry rates, that no more rates should be tried.
651 *
652 * When used for transmit status reporting, the driver should
653 * always report the rate along with the flags it used.
Johannes Bergc555b9b2009-08-07 16:23:43 +0200654 *
655 * &struct ieee80211_tx_info contains an array of these structs
656 * in the control information, and it will be filled by the rate
657 * control algorithm according to what should be sent. For example,
658 * if this array contains, in the format { <idx>, <count> } the
659 * information
660 * { 3, 2 }, { 2, 2 }, { 1, 4 }, { -1, 0 }, { -1, 0 }
661 * then this means that the frame should be transmitted
662 * up to twice at rate 3, up to twice at rate 2, and up to four
663 * times at rate 1 if it doesn't get acknowledged. Say it gets
664 * acknowledged by the peer after the fifth attempt, the status
665 * information should then contain
666 * { 3, 2 }, { 2, 2 }, { 1, 1 }, { -1, 0 } ...
667 * since it was transmitted twice at rate 3, twice at rate 2
668 * and once at rate 1 after which we received an acknowledgement.
Felix Fietkau870abdf2008-10-05 18:04:24 +0200669 */
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200670struct ieee80211_tx_rate {
671 s8 idx;
Johannes Berg8bc83c22012-11-09 18:38:32 +0100672 u16 count:5,
673 flags:11;
Gustavo F. Padovan3f30fc12010-07-21 10:59:58 +0000674} __packed;
Felix Fietkau870abdf2008-10-05 18:04:24 +0200675
Johannes Berg8bc83c22012-11-09 18:38:32 +0100676#define IEEE80211_MAX_TX_RETRY 31
677
678static inline void ieee80211_rate_set_vht(struct ieee80211_tx_rate *rate,
679 u8 mcs, u8 nss)
680{
681 WARN_ON(mcs & ~0xF);
Karl Beldan6bc83122013-04-15 17:09:29 +0200682 WARN_ON((nss - 1) & ~0x7);
683 rate->idx = ((nss - 1) << 4) | mcs;
Johannes Berg8bc83c22012-11-09 18:38:32 +0100684}
685
686static inline u8
687ieee80211_rate_get_vht_mcs(const struct ieee80211_tx_rate *rate)
688{
689 return rate->idx & 0xF;
690}
691
692static inline u8
693ieee80211_rate_get_vht_nss(const struct ieee80211_tx_rate *rate)
694{
Karl Beldan6bc83122013-04-15 17:09:29 +0200695 return (rate->idx >> 4) + 1;
Johannes Berg8bc83c22012-11-09 18:38:32 +0100696}
697
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200698/**
699 * struct ieee80211_tx_info - skb transmit information
Ivo van Doorn1c014422008-04-17 19:41:02 +0200700 *
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200701 * This structure is placed in skb->cb for three uses:
702 * (1) mac80211 TX control - mac80211 tells the driver what to do
703 * (2) driver internal use (if applicable)
704 * (3) TX status information - driver tells mac80211 what happened
705 *
706 * @flags: transmit info flags, defined above
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200707 * @band: the band to transmit on (use for checking for races)
Johannes Berg3a25a8c2012-04-03 16:28:50 +0200708 * @hw_queue: HW queue to put the frame on, skb_get_queue_mapping() gives the AC
Johannes Berga729cff2011-11-06 14:13:34 +0100709 * @ack_frame_id: internal frame ID for TX status, used internally
Randy Dunlap6ef307b2008-07-03 13:52:18 -0700710 * @control: union for control data
711 * @status: union for status data
712 * @driver_data: array of driver_data pointers
Felix Fietkau599bf6a2009-11-15 23:07:30 +0100713 * @ampdu_ack_len: number of acked aggregated frames.
Daniel Halperin93d95b12010-04-18 09:28:18 -0700714 * relevant only if IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU was set.
Felix Fietkau599bf6a2009-11-15 23:07:30 +0100715 * @ampdu_len: number of aggregated frames.
Daniel Halperin93d95b12010-04-18 09:28:18 -0700716 * relevant only if IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU was set.
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200717 * @ack_signal: signal strength of the ACK frame
Ivo van Doorn1c014422008-04-17 19:41:02 +0200718 */
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200719struct ieee80211_tx_info {
720 /* common information */
721 u32 flags;
722 u8 band;
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200723
Johannes Berg3a25a8c2012-04-03 16:28:50 +0200724 u8 hw_queue;
Johannes Berg8318d782008-01-24 19:38:38 +0100725
Johannes Berga729cff2011-11-06 14:13:34 +0100726 u16 ack_frame_id;
Johannes Berg8318d782008-01-24 19:38:38 +0100727
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200728 union {
729 struct {
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200730 union {
731 /* rate control */
732 struct {
733 struct ieee80211_tx_rate rates[
734 IEEE80211_TX_MAX_RATES];
735 s8 rts_cts_rate_idx;
Felix Fietkau991fec02013-04-16 13:38:43 +0200736 u8 use_rts:1;
737 u8 use_cts_prot:1;
Felix Fietkau0d528d82013-04-22 16:14:41 +0200738 u8 short_preamble:1;
739 u8 skip_table:1;
Felix Fietkau991fec02013-04-16 13:38:43 +0200740 /* 2 bytes free */
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200741 };
742 /* only needed before rate control */
743 unsigned long jiffies;
744 };
Johannes Berg25d834e2008-09-12 22:52:47 +0200745 /* NB: vif can be NULL for injected frames */
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200746 struct ieee80211_vif *vif;
747 struct ieee80211_key_conf *hw_key;
Johannes Bergaf61a162013-07-02 18:09:12 +0200748 u32 flags;
749 /* 4 bytes free */
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200750 } control;
751 struct {
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200752 struct ieee80211_tx_rate rates[IEEE80211_TX_MAX_RATES];
Eliad Pellera0f995a2014-03-13 14:30:47 +0200753 s32 ack_signal;
Thomas Huehne3e1a0b2012-07-02 19:46:16 +0200754 u8 ampdu_ack_len;
Felix Fietkau599bf6a2009-11-15 23:07:30 +0100755 u8 ampdu_len;
Johannes Bergd748b462012-03-28 11:04:23 +0200756 u8 antenna;
Johannes Berg02219b32014-10-07 10:38:50 +0300757 u16 tx_time;
758 void *status_driver_data[19 / sizeof(void *)];
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200759 } status;
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200760 struct {
761 struct ieee80211_tx_rate driver_rates[
762 IEEE80211_TX_MAX_RATES];
Felix Fietkau0d528d82013-04-22 16:14:41 +0200763 u8 pad[4];
764
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200765 void *rate_driver_data[
766 IEEE80211_TX_INFO_RATE_DRIVER_DATA_SIZE / sizeof(void *)];
767 };
768 void *driver_data[
769 IEEE80211_TX_INFO_DRIVER_DATA_SIZE / sizeof(void *)];
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200770 };
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -0700771};
772
Luciano Coelho79f460c2011-05-11 17:09:36 +0300773/**
David Spinadelc56ef672014-02-05 15:21:13 +0200774 * struct ieee80211_scan_ies - descriptors for different blocks of IEs
775 *
David Spinadel633e2712014-02-06 16:15:23 +0200776 * This structure is used to point to different blocks of IEs in HW scan
777 * and scheduled scan. These blocks contain the IEs passed by userspace
778 * and the ones generated by mac80211.
David Spinadelc56ef672014-02-05 15:21:13 +0200779 *
780 * @ies: pointers to band specific IEs.
781 * @len: lengths of band_specific IEs.
782 * @common_ies: IEs for all bands (especially vendor specific ones)
783 * @common_ie_len: length of the common_ies
784 */
785struct ieee80211_scan_ies {
786 const u8 *ies[IEEE80211_NUM_BANDS];
787 size_t len[IEEE80211_NUM_BANDS];
788 const u8 *common_ies;
789 size_t common_ie_len;
790};
791
792
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200793static inline struct ieee80211_tx_info *IEEE80211_SKB_CB(struct sk_buff *skb)
794{
795 return (struct ieee80211_tx_info *)skb->cb;
796}
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -0400797
Johannes Bergf1d58c22009-06-17 13:13:00 +0200798static inline struct ieee80211_rx_status *IEEE80211_SKB_RXCB(struct sk_buff *skb)
799{
800 return (struct ieee80211_rx_status *)skb->cb;
801}
802
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200803/**
804 * ieee80211_tx_info_clear_status - clear TX status
805 *
806 * @info: The &struct ieee80211_tx_info to be cleared.
807 *
808 * When the driver passes an skb back to mac80211, it must report
809 * a number of things in TX status. This function clears everything
810 * in the TX status but the rate control information (it does clear
811 * the count since you need to fill that in anyway).
812 *
813 * NOTE: You can only use this function if you do NOT use
814 * info->driver_data! Use info->rate_driver_data
815 * instead if you need only the less space that allows.
816 */
817static inline void
818ieee80211_tx_info_clear_status(struct ieee80211_tx_info *info)
819{
820 int i;
821
822 BUILD_BUG_ON(offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, status.rates) !=
823 offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, control.rates));
824 BUILD_BUG_ON(offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, status.rates) !=
825 offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, driver_rates));
826 BUILD_BUG_ON(offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, status.rates) != 8);
827 /* clear the rate counts */
828 for (i = 0; i < IEEE80211_TX_MAX_RATES; i++)
829 info->status.rates[i].count = 0;
830
831 BUILD_BUG_ON(
Thomas Huehne3e1a0b2012-07-02 19:46:16 +0200832 offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, status.ack_signal) != 20);
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200833 memset(&info->status.ampdu_ack_len, 0,
834 sizeof(struct ieee80211_tx_info) -
835 offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, status.ampdu_ack_len));
836}
837
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -0400838
839/**
840 * enum mac80211_rx_flags - receive flags
841 *
842 * These flags are used with the @flag member of &struct ieee80211_rx_status.
843 * @RX_FLAG_MMIC_ERROR: Michael MIC error was reported on this frame.
844 * Use together with %RX_FLAG_MMIC_STRIPPED.
845 * @RX_FLAG_DECRYPTED: This frame was decrypted in hardware.
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -0400846 * @RX_FLAG_MMIC_STRIPPED: the Michael MIC is stripped off this frame,
847 * verification has been done by the hardware.
848 * @RX_FLAG_IV_STRIPPED: The IV/ICV are stripped from this frame.
849 * If this flag is set, the stack cannot do any replay detection
850 * hence the driver or hardware will have to do that.
Johannes Berg72abd812007-09-17 01:29:22 -0400851 * @RX_FLAG_FAILED_FCS_CRC: Set this flag if the FCS check failed on
852 * the frame.
853 * @RX_FLAG_FAILED_PLCP_CRC: Set this flag if the PCLP check failed on
854 * the frame.
Thomas Pedersenf4bda332012-11-13 10:46:27 -0800855 * @RX_FLAG_MACTIME_START: The timestamp passed in the RX status (@mactime
Johannes Berg6ebacbb2011-02-23 15:06:08 +0100856 * field) is valid and contains the time the first symbol of the MPDU
857 * was received. This is useful in monitor mode and for proper IBSS
858 * merging.
Thomas Pedersenf4bda332012-11-13 10:46:27 -0800859 * @RX_FLAG_MACTIME_END: The timestamp passed in the RX status (@mactime
860 * field) is valid and contains the time the last symbol of the MPDU
861 * (including FCS) was received.
Bruno Randolfb4f28bb2008-07-30 17:19:55 +0200862 * @RX_FLAG_SHORTPRE: Short preamble was used for this frame
Jouni Malinen0fb8ca42008-12-12 14:38:33 +0200863 * @RX_FLAG_HT: HT MCS was used and rate_idx is MCS index
Johannes Berg56146182012-11-09 15:07:02 +0100864 * @RX_FLAG_VHT: VHT MCS was used and rate_index is MCS index
Jouni Malinen0fb8ca42008-12-12 14:38:33 +0200865 * @RX_FLAG_40MHZ: HT40 (40 MHz) was used
866 * @RX_FLAG_SHORT_GI: Short guard interval was used
Felix Fietkaufe8431f2012-03-01 18:00:07 +0100867 * @RX_FLAG_NO_SIGNAL_VAL: The signal strength value is not present.
868 * Valid only for data frames (mainly A-MPDU)
Johannes Bergac55d2f2012-05-10 09:09:10 +0200869 * @RX_FLAG_HT_GF: This frame was received in a HT-greenfield transmission, if
870 * the driver fills this value it should add %IEEE80211_RADIOTAP_MCS_HAVE_FMT
871 * to hw.radiotap_mcs_details to advertise that fact
Johannes Berg4c298672012-07-05 11:34:31 +0200872 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DETAILS: A-MPDU details are known, in particular the reference
873 * number (@ampdu_reference) must be populated and be a distinct number for
874 * each A-MPDU
875 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_REPORT_ZEROLEN: driver reports 0-length subframes
876 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_IS_ZEROLEN: This is a zero-length subframe, for
877 * monitoring purposes only
878 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_LAST_KNOWN: last subframe is known, should be set on all
879 * subframes of a single A-MPDU
880 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_IS_LAST: this subframe is the last subframe of the A-MPDU
881 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DELIM_CRC_ERROR: A delimiter CRC error has been detected
882 * on this subframe
883 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DELIM_CRC_KNOWN: The delimiter CRC field is known (the CRC
884 * is stored in the @ampdu_delimiter_crc field)
Emmanuel Grumbach63c361f2014-02-05 12:48:53 +0200885 * @RX_FLAG_LDPC: LDPC was used
Oleksij Rempel786677d2013-05-24 12:05:45 +0200886 * @RX_FLAG_STBC_MASK: STBC 2 bit bitmask. 1 - Nss=1, 2 - Nss=2, 3 - Nss=3
Simon Wunderlicha5e70692013-07-08 16:55:52 +0200887 * @RX_FLAG_10MHZ: 10 MHz (half channel) was used
888 * @RX_FLAG_5MHZ: 5 MHz (quarter channel) was used
Michal Kazior0cfcefe2013-09-23 15:34:38 +0200889 * @RX_FLAG_AMSDU_MORE: Some drivers may prefer to report separate A-MSDU
890 * subframes instead of a one huge frame for performance reasons.
891 * All, but the last MSDU from an A-MSDU should have this flag set. E.g.
892 * if an A-MSDU has 3 frames, the first 2 must have the flag set, while
893 * the 3rd (last) one must not have this flag set. The flag is used to
894 * deal with retransmission/duplication recovery properly since A-MSDU
895 * subframes share the same sequence number. Reported subframes can be
896 * either regular MSDU or singly A-MSDUs. Subframes must not be
897 * interleaved with other frames.
Johannes Berg1f7bba72014-11-06 22:56:36 +0100898 * @RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_VENDOR_DATA: This frame contains vendor-specific
899 * radiotap data in the skb->data (before the frame) as described by
900 * the &struct ieee80211_vendor_radiotap.
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -0400901 */
902enum mac80211_rx_flags {
Johannes Berg4c298672012-07-05 11:34:31 +0200903 RX_FLAG_MMIC_ERROR = BIT(0),
904 RX_FLAG_DECRYPTED = BIT(1),
905 RX_FLAG_MMIC_STRIPPED = BIT(3),
906 RX_FLAG_IV_STRIPPED = BIT(4),
907 RX_FLAG_FAILED_FCS_CRC = BIT(5),
908 RX_FLAG_FAILED_PLCP_CRC = BIT(6),
Thomas Pedersenf4bda332012-11-13 10:46:27 -0800909 RX_FLAG_MACTIME_START = BIT(7),
Johannes Berg4c298672012-07-05 11:34:31 +0200910 RX_FLAG_SHORTPRE = BIT(8),
911 RX_FLAG_HT = BIT(9),
912 RX_FLAG_40MHZ = BIT(10),
913 RX_FLAG_SHORT_GI = BIT(11),
914 RX_FLAG_NO_SIGNAL_VAL = BIT(12),
915 RX_FLAG_HT_GF = BIT(13),
916 RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DETAILS = BIT(14),
917 RX_FLAG_AMPDU_REPORT_ZEROLEN = BIT(15),
918 RX_FLAG_AMPDU_IS_ZEROLEN = BIT(16),
919 RX_FLAG_AMPDU_LAST_KNOWN = BIT(17),
920 RX_FLAG_AMPDU_IS_LAST = BIT(18),
921 RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DELIM_CRC_ERROR = BIT(19),
922 RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DELIM_CRC_KNOWN = BIT(20),
Thomas Pedersenf4bda332012-11-13 10:46:27 -0800923 RX_FLAG_MACTIME_END = BIT(21),
Johannes Berg56146182012-11-09 15:07:02 +0100924 RX_FLAG_VHT = BIT(22),
Emmanuel Grumbach63c361f2014-02-05 12:48:53 +0200925 RX_FLAG_LDPC = BIT(23),
Oleksij Rempel786677d2013-05-24 12:05:45 +0200926 RX_FLAG_STBC_MASK = BIT(26) | BIT(27),
Simon Wunderlicha5e70692013-07-08 16:55:52 +0200927 RX_FLAG_10MHZ = BIT(28),
928 RX_FLAG_5MHZ = BIT(29),
Michal Kazior0cfcefe2013-09-23 15:34:38 +0200929 RX_FLAG_AMSDU_MORE = BIT(30),
Johannes Berg1f7bba72014-11-06 22:56:36 +0100930 RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_VENDOR_DATA = BIT(31),
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -0400931};
932
Oleksij Rempel786677d2013-05-24 12:05:45 +0200933#define RX_FLAG_STBC_SHIFT 26
934
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -0400935/**
Emmanuel Grumbach1b8d2422014-02-05 16:37:11 +0200936 * enum mac80211_rx_vht_flags - receive VHT flags
937 *
938 * These flags are used with the @vht_flag member of
939 * &struct ieee80211_rx_status.
940 * @RX_VHT_FLAG_80MHZ: 80 MHz was used
Emmanuel Grumbach1b8d2422014-02-05 16:37:11 +0200941 * @RX_VHT_FLAG_160MHZ: 160 MHz was used
Emmanuel Grumbachfb378c22014-03-04 10:35:25 +0200942 * @RX_VHT_FLAG_BF: packet was beamformed
Emmanuel Grumbach1b8d2422014-02-05 16:37:11 +0200943 */
944enum mac80211_rx_vht_flags {
945 RX_VHT_FLAG_80MHZ = BIT(0),
Johannes Bergf89903d2015-01-15 16:02:46 +0100946 RX_VHT_FLAG_160MHZ = BIT(1),
947 RX_VHT_FLAG_BF = BIT(2),
Emmanuel Grumbach1b8d2422014-02-05 16:37:11 +0200948};
949
950/**
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -0400951 * struct ieee80211_rx_status - receive status
952 *
953 * The low-level driver should provide this information (the subset
954 * supported by hardware) to the 802.11 code with each received
Johannes Bergf1d58c22009-06-17 13:13:00 +0200955 * frame, in the skb's control buffer (cb).
Bruno Randolf566bfe52008-05-08 19:15:40 +0200956 *
Bruno Randolfc132bec2008-02-18 11:20:51 +0900957 * @mactime: value in microseconds of the 64-bit Time Synchronization Function
958 * (TSF) timer when the first data symbol (MPDU) arrived at the hardware.
Johannes Berg8c358bc2012-05-22 22:13:05 +0200959 * @device_timestamp: arbitrary timestamp for the device, mac80211 doesn't use
960 * it but can store it and pass it back to the driver for synchronisation
Johannes Berg8318d782008-01-24 19:38:38 +0100961 * @band: the active band when this frame was received
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -0400962 * @freq: frequency the radio was tuned to when receiving this frame, in MHz
Bruno Randolf566bfe52008-05-08 19:15:40 +0200963 * @signal: signal strength when receiving this frame, either in dBm, in dB or
964 * unspecified depending on the hardware capabilities flags
965 * @IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_*
Felix Fietkauef0621e2013-04-22 16:29:31 +0200966 * @chains: bitmask of receive chains for which separate signal strength
967 * values were filled.
968 * @chain_signal: per-chain signal strength, in dBm (unlike @signal, doesn't
969 * support dB or unspecified units)
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -0400970 * @antenna: antenna used
Jouni Malinen0fb8ca42008-12-12 14:38:33 +0200971 * @rate_idx: index of data rate into band's supported rates or MCS index if
Johannes Berg56146182012-11-09 15:07:02 +0100972 * HT or VHT is used (%RX_FLAG_HT/%RX_FLAG_VHT)
973 * @vht_nss: number of streams (VHT only)
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -0400974 * @flag: %RX_FLAG_*
Emmanuel Grumbach1b8d2422014-02-05 16:37:11 +0200975 * @vht_flag: %RX_VHT_FLAG_*
Johannes Berg554891e2010-09-24 12:38:25 +0200976 * @rx_flags: internal RX flags for mac80211
Johannes Berg4c298672012-07-05 11:34:31 +0200977 * @ampdu_reference: A-MPDU reference number, must be a different value for
978 * each A-MPDU but the same for each subframe within one A-MPDU
979 * @ampdu_delimiter_crc: A-MPDU delimiter CRC
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -0400980 */
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -0700981struct ieee80211_rx_status {
982 u64 mactime;
Johannes Berg8c358bc2012-05-22 22:13:05 +0200983 u32 device_timestamp;
Johannes Berg4c298672012-07-05 11:34:31 +0200984 u32 ampdu_reference;
985 u32 flag;
Johannes Berg30f42292012-07-05 13:14:18 +0200986 u16 freq;
Emmanuel Grumbach1b8d2422014-02-05 16:37:11 +0200987 u8 vht_flag;
Johannes Berg30f42292012-07-05 13:14:18 +0200988 u8 rate_idx;
Johannes Berg56146182012-11-09 15:07:02 +0100989 u8 vht_nss;
Johannes Berg30f42292012-07-05 13:14:18 +0200990 u8 rx_flags;
991 u8 band;
992 u8 antenna;
993 s8 signal;
Felix Fietkauef0621e2013-04-22 16:29:31 +0200994 u8 chains;
995 s8 chain_signal[IEEE80211_MAX_CHAINS];
Johannes Berg4c298672012-07-05 11:34:31 +0200996 u8 ampdu_delimiter_crc;
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -0700997};
998
Johannes Berg6b301cd2007-09-18 17:29:20 -0400999/**
Johannes Berg1f7bba72014-11-06 22:56:36 +01001000 * struct ieee80211_vendor_radiotap - vendor radiotap data information
1001 * @present: presence bitmap for this vendor namespace
1002 * (this could be extended in the future if any vendor needs more
1003 * bits, the radiotap spec does allow for that)
1004 * @align: radiotap vendor namespace alignment. This defines the needed
1005 * alignment for the @data field below, not for the vendor namespace
1006 * description itself (which has a fixed 2-byte alignment)
1007 * Must be a power of two, and be set to at least 1!
1008 * @oui: radiotap vendor namespace OUI
1009 * @subns: radiotap vendor sub namespace
1010 * @len: radiotap vendor sub namespace skip length, if alignment is done
1011 * then that's added to this, i.e. this is only the length of the
1012 * @data field.
1013 * @pad: number of bytes of padding after the @data, this exists so that
1014 * the skb data alignment can be preserved even if the data has odd
1015 * length
1016 * @data: the actual vendor namespace data
1017 *
1018 * This struct, including the vendor data, goes into the skb->data before
1019 * the 802.11 header. It's split up in mac80211 using the align/oui/subns
1020 * data.
1021 */
1022struct ieee80211_vendor_radiotap {
1023 u32 present;
1024 u8 align;
1025 u8 oui[3];
1026 u8 subns;
1027 u8 pad;
1028 u16 len;
1029 u8 data[];
1030} __packed;
1031
1032/**
Johannes Berg6b301cd2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04001033 * enum ieee80211_conf_flags - configuration flags
1034 *
1035 * Flags to define PHY configuration options
1036 *
Johannes Berg0869aea2009-10-28 10:03:35 +01001037 * @IEEE80211_CONF_MONITOR: there's a monitor interface present -- use this
1038 * to determine for example whether to calculate timestamps for packets
1039 * or not, do not use instead of filter flags!
Kalle Valoc99445b2010-01-14 13:09:21 +02001040 * @IEEE80211_CONF_PS: Enable 802.11 power save mode (managed mode only).
1041 * This is the power save mode defined by IEEE 802.11-2007 section 11.2,
1042 * meaning that the hardware still wakes up for beacons, is able to
1043 * transmit frames and receive the possible acknowledgment frames.
1044 * Not to be confused with hardware specific wakeup/sleep states,
1045 * driver is responsible for that. See the section "Powersave support"
1046 * for more.
Johannes Berg5cff20e2009-04-29 12:26:17 +02001047 * @IEEE80211_CONF_IDLE: The device is running, but idle; if the flag is set
1048 * the driver should be prepared to handle configuration requests but
1049 * may turn the device off as much as possible. Typically, this flag will
1050 * be set when an interface is set UP but not associated or scanning, but
1051 * it can also be unset in that case when monitor interfaces are active.
Felix Fietkau45521242010-07-28 02:40:49 +02001052 * @IEEE80211_CONF_OFFCHANNEL: The device is currently not on its main
1053 * operating channel.
Johannes Berg6b301cd2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04001054 */
1055enum ieee80211_conf_flags {
Johannes Berg0869aea2009-10-28 10:03:35 +01001056 IEEE80211_CONF_MONITOR = (1<<0),
Johannes Bergae5eb022008-10-14 16:58:37 +02001057 IEEE80211_CONF_PS = (1<<1),
Johannes Berg5cff20e2009-04-29 12:26:17 +02001058 IEEE80211_CONF_IDLE = (1<<2),
Felix Fietkau45521242010-07-28 02:40:49 +02001059 IEEE80211_CONF_OFFCHANNEL = (1<<3),
Johannes Berg6b301cd2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04001060};
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07001061
Johannes Berg7a5158e2008-10-08 10:59:33 +02001062
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07001063/**
Johannes Berge8975582008-10-09 12:18:51 +02001064 * enum ieee80211_conf_changed - denotes which configuration changed
1065 *
Johannes Berge8975582008-10-09 12:18:51 +02001066 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_LISTEN_INTERVAL: the listen interval changed
Johannes Berg0869aea2009-10-28 10:03:35 +01001067 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_MONITOR: the monitor flag changed
Johannes Berge255d5e2009-04-22 12:40:07 +02001068 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_PS: the PS flag or dynamic PS timeout changed
Johannes Berge8975582008-10-09 12:18:51 +02001069 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_POWER: the TX power changed
Johannes Berg47979382009-01-07 10:13:27 +01001070 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_CHANNEL: the channel/channel_type changed
Johannes Berg9124b072008-10-14 19:17:54 +02001071 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_RETRY_LIMITS: retry limits changed
Johannes Berg5cff20e2009-04-29 12:26:17 +02001072 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_IDLE: Idle flag changed
Johannes Berg0f782312009-12-01 13:37:02 +01001073 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_SMPS: Spatial multiplexing powersave mode changed
Johannes Berg04ecd252012-09-11 14:34:12 +02001074 * Note that this is only valid if channel contexts are not used,
1075 * otherwise each channel context has the number of chains listed.
Johannes Berge8975582008-10-09 12:18:51 +02001076 */
1077enum ieee80211_conf_changed {
Johannes Berg0f782312009-12-01 13:37:02 +01001078 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_SMPS = BIT(1),
Johannes Berge8975582008-10-09 12:18:51 +02001079 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_LISTEN_INTERVAL = BIT(2),
Johannes Berg0869aea2009-10-28 10:03:35 +01001080 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_MONITOR = BIT(3),
Johannes Berge8975582008-10-09 12:18:51 +02001081 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_PS = BIT(4),
Johannes Berge255d5e2009-04-22 12:40:07 +02001082 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_POWER = BIT(5),
1083 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_CHANNEL = BIT(6),
1084 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_RETRY_LIMITS = BIT(7),
Johannes Berg5cff20e2009-04-29 12:26:17 +02001085 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_IDLE = BIT(8),
Johannes Berge8975582008-10-09 12:18:51 +02001086};
1087
1088/**
Johannes Berg0f782312009-12-01 13:37:02 +01001089 * enum ieee80211_smps_mode - spatial multiplexing power save mode
1090 *
Kalle Valo9d173fc2010-01-14 13:09:14 +02001091 * @IEEE80211_SMPS_AUTOMATIC: automatic
1092 * @IEEE80211_SMPS_OFF: off
1093 * @IEEE80211_SMPS_STATIC: static
1094 * @IEEE80211_SMPS_DYNAMIC: dynamic
1095 * @IEEE80211_SMPS_NUM_MODES: internal, don't use
Johannes Berg0f782312009-12-01 13:37:02 +01001096 */
1097enum ieee80211_smps_mode {
1098 IEEE80211_SMPS_AUTOMATIC,
1099 IEEE80211_SMPS_OFF,
1100 IEEE80211_SMPS_STATIC,
1101 IEEE80211_SMPS_DYNAMIC,
1102
1103 /* keep last */
1104 IEEE80211_SMPS_NUM_MODES,
1105};
1106
1107/**
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07001108 * struct ieee80211_conf - configuration of the device
1109 *
1110 * This struct indicates how the driver shall configure the hardware.
1111 *
Johannes Berg04fe2032009-04-22 18:44:37 +02001112 * @flags: configuration flags defined above
1113 *
Tomas Winklerea95bba2008-07-18 13:53:00 +08001114 * @listen_interval: listen interval in units of beacon interval
Johannes Berg9ccebe62009-04-23 10:32:36 +02001115 * @max_sleep_period: the maximum number of beacon intervals to sleep for
Johannes Berg04fe2032009-04-22 18:44:37 +02001116 * before checking the beacon for a TIM bit (managed mode only); this
1117 * value will be only achievable between DTIM frames, the hardware
1118 * needs to check for the multicast traffic bit in DTIM beacons.
1119 * This variable is valid only when the CONF_PS flag is set.
Johannes Berg56007a02010-01-26 14:19:52 +01001120 * @ps_dtim_period: The DTIM period of the AP we're connected to, for use
1121 * in power saving. Power saving will not be enabled until a beacon
1122 * has been received and the DTIM period is known.
Johannes Berg04fe2032009-04-22 18:44:37 +02001123 * @dynamic_ps_timeout: The dynamic powersave timeout (in ms), see the
1124 * powersave documentation below. This variable is valid only when
1125 * the CONF_PS flag is set.
1126 *
Johannes Berg1ea6f9c2012-10-24 10:59:25 +02001127 * @power_level: requested transmit power (in dBm), backward compatibility
1128 * value only that is set to the minimum of all interfaces
Johannes Berg04fe2032009-04-22 18:44:37 +02001129 *
Karl Beldan675a0b02013-03-25 16:26:57 +01001130 * @chandef: the channel definition to tune to
Simon Wunderlich164eb022013-02-08 18:16:20 +01001131 * @radar_enabled: whether radar detection is enabled
Johannes Berg04fe2032009-04-22 18:44:37 +02001132 *
Johannes Berg9124b072008-10-14 19:17:54 +02001133 * @long_frame_max_tx_count: Maximum number of transmissions for a "long" frame
Johannes Bergad24b0d2013-07-05 11:53:28 +02001134 * (a frame not RTS protected), called "dot11LongRetryLimit" in 802.11,
1135 * but actually means the number of transmissions not the number of retries
Johannes Berg9124b072008-10-14 19:17:54 +02001136 * @short_frame_max_tx_count: Maximum number of transmissions for a "short"
Johannes Bergad24b0d2013-07-05 11:53:28 +02001137 * frame, called "dot11ShortRetryLimit" in 802.11, but actually means the
1138 * number of transmissions not the number of retries
Johannes Berg0f782312009-12-01 13:37:02 +01001139 *
1140 * @smps_mode: spatial multiplexing powersave mode; note that
1141 * %IEEE80211_SMPS_STATIC is used when the device is not
Johannes Berg04ecd252012-09-11 14:34:12 +02001142 * configured for an HT channel.
1143 * Note that this is only valid if channel contexts are not used,
1144 * otherwise each channel context has the number of chains listed.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07001145 */
1146struct ieee80211_conf {
Johannes Berg6b301cd2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04001147 u32 flags;
Juuso Oikarinenff616382010-06-09 09:51:52 +03001148 int power_level, dynamic_ps_timeout;
Johannes Berg9ccebe62009-04-23 10:32:36 +02001149 int max_sleep_period;
Ron Rindjunsky10816d42007-11-26 16:14:30 +02001150
Johannes Berge8975582008-10-09 12:18:51 +02001151 u16 listen_interval;
Johannes Berg56007a02010-01-26 14:19:52 +01001152 u8 ps_dtim_period;
Johannes Berge8975582008-10-09 12:18:51 +02001153
Johannes Berg9124b072008-10-14 19:17:54 +02001154 u8 long_frame_max_tx_count, short_frame_max_tx_count;
1155
Karl Beldan675a0b02013-03-25 16:26:57 +01001156 struct cfg80211_chan_def chandef;
Simon Wunderlich164eb022013-02-08 18:16:20 +01001157 bool radar_enabled;
Johannes Berg0f782312009-12-01 13:37:02 +01001158 enum ieee80211_smps_mode smps_mode;
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07001159};
1160
1161/**
Johannes Berg5ce6e432010-05-11 16:20:57 +02001162 * struct ieee80211_channel_switch - holds the channel switch data
1163 *
1164 * The information provided in this structure is required for channel switch
1165 * operation.
1166 *
1167 * @timestamp: value in microseconds of the 64-bit Time Synchronization
1168 * Function (TSF) timer when the frame containing the channel switch
1169 * announcement was received. This is simply the rx.mactime parameter
1170 * the driver passed into mac80211.
Luciano Coelho2ba45382014-10-08 09:48:35 +03001171 * @device_timestamp: arbitrary timestamp for the device, this is the
1172 * rx.device_timestamp parameter the driver passed to mac80211.
Johannes Berg5ce6e432010-05-11 16:20:57 +02001173 * @block_tx: Indicates whether transmission must be blocked before the
1174 * scheduled channel switch, as indicated by the AP.
Johannes Berg85220d72013-03-25 18:29:27 +01001175 * @chandef: the new channel to switch to
Johannes Berg5ce6e432010-05-11 16:20:57 +02001176 * @count: the number of TBTT's until the channel switch event
1177 */
1178struct ieee80211_channel_switch {
1179 u64 timestamp;
Luciano Coelho2ba45382014-10-08 09:48:35 +03001180 u32 device_timestamp;
Johannes Berg5ce6e432010-05-11 16:20:57 +02001181 bool block_tx;
Johannes Berg85220d72013-03-25 18:29:27 +01001182 struct cfg80211_chan_def chandef;
Johannes Berg5ce6e432010-05-11 16:20:57 +02001183 u8 count;
1184};
1185
1186/**
Johannes Bergc1288b12012-01-19 09:29:57 +01001187 * enum ieee80211_vif_flags - virtual interface flags
1188 *
1189 * @IEEE80211_VIF_BEACON_FILTER: the device performs beacon filtering
1190 * on this virtual interface to avoid unnecessary CPU wakeups
Johannes Bergea086352012-01-19 09:29:58 +01001191 * @IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_CQM_RSSI: the device can do connection quality
1192 * monitoring on this virtual interface -- i.e. it can monitor
1193 * connection quality related parameters, such as the RSSI level and
1194 * provide notifications if configured trigger levels are reached.
Johannes Berg848955c2014-11-11 12:48:42 +01001195 * @IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_UAPSD: The device can do U-APSD for this
1196 * interface. This flag should be set during interface addition,
1197 * but may be set/cleared as late as authentication to an AP. It is
1198 * only valid for managed/station mode interfaces.
Johannes Bergc1288b12012-01-19 09:29:57 +01001199 */
1200enum ieee80211_vif_flags {
1201 IEEE80211_VIF_BEACON_FILTER = BIT(0),
Johannes Bergea086352012-01-19 09:29:58 +01001202 IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_CQM_RSSI = BIT(1),
Johannes Berg848955c2014-11-11 12:48:42 +01001203 IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_UAPSD = BIT(2),
Johannes Bergc1288b12012-01-19 09:29:57 +01001204};
1205
1206/**
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01001207 * struct ieee80211_vif - per-interface data
1208 *
1209 * Data in this structure is continually present for driver
1210 * use during the life of a virtual interface.
1211 *
Johannes Berg51fb61e2007-12-19 01:31:27 +01001212 * @type: type of this virtual interface
Johannes Bergbda39332008-10-11 01:51:51 +02001213 * @bss_conf: BSS configuration for this interface, either our own
1214 * or the BSS we're associated to
Johannes Berg47846c92009-11-25 17:46:19 +01001215 * @addr: address of this interface
Johannes Berg2ca27bc2010-09-16 14:58:23 +02001216 * @p2p: indicates whether this AP or STA interface is a p2p
1217 * interface, i.e. a GO or p2p-sta respectively
Michal Kazior59af6922014-04-09 15:10:59 +02001218 * @csa_active: marks whether a channel switch is going on. Internally it is
1219 * write-protected by sdata_lock and local->mtx so holding either is fine
1220 * for read access.
Johannes Bergc1288b12012-01-19 09:29:57 +01001221 * @driver_flags: flags/capabilities the driver has for this interface,
1222 * these need to be set (or cleared) when the interface is added
1223 * or, if supported by the driver, the interface type is changed
1224 * at runtime, mac80211 will never touch this field
Johannes Berg3a25a8c2012-04-03 16:28:50 +02001225 * @hw_queue: hardware queue for each AC
1226 * @cab_queue: content-after-beacon (DTIM beacon really) queue, AP mode only
Michal Kaziord01a1e62012-06-26 14:37:16 +02001227 * @chanctx_conf: The channel context this interface is assigned to, or %NULL
1228 * when it is not assigned. This pointer is RCU-protected due to the TX
1229 * path needing to access it; even though the netdev carrier will always
1230 * be off when it is %NULL there can still be races and packets could be
1231 * processed after it switches back to %NULL.
Stanislaw Gruszkaddbfe862013-03-08 14:46:14 +01001232 * @debugfs_dir: debugfs dentry, can be used by drivers to create own per
Johannes Bergad24b0d2013-07-05 11:53:28 +02001233 * interface debug files. Note that it will be NULL for the virtual
Stanislaw Gruszkaddbfe862013-03-08 14:46:14 +01001234 * monitor interface (if that is requested.)
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01001235 * @drv_priv: data area for driver use, will always be aligned to
1236 * sizeof(void *).
1237 */
1238struct ieee80211_vif {
Johannes Berg05c914f2008-09-11 00:01:58 +02001239 enum nl80211_iftype type;
Johannes Bergbda39332008-10-11 01:51:51 +02001240 struct ieee80211_bss_conf bss_conf;
Johannes Berg47846c92009-11-25 17:46:19 +01001241 u8 addr[ETH_ALEN];
Johannes Berg2ca27bc2010-09-16 14:58:23 +02001242 bool p2p;
Simon Wunderlich73da7d52013-07-11 16:09:06 +02001243 bool csa_active;
Johannes Berg3a25a8c2012-04-03 16:28:50 +02001244
1245 u8 cab_queue;
1246 u8 hw_queue[IEEE80211_NUM_ACS];
1247
Michal Kaziord01a1e62012-06-26 14:37:16 +02001248 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf __rcu *chanctx_conf;
1249
Johannes Bergc1288b12012-01-19 09:29:57 +01001250 u32 driver_flags;
Johannes Berg3a25a8c2012-04-03 16:28:50 +02001251
Stanislaw Gruszkaddbfe862013-03-08 14:46:14 +01001252#ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_DEBUGFS
1253 struct dentry *debugfs_dir;
1254#endif
1255
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01001256 /* must be last */
Johannes Berg1c06ef92012-12-28 12:22:02 +01001257 u8 drv_priv[0] __aligned(sizeof(void *));
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01001258};
1259
Johannes Berg902acc72008-02-23 15:17:19 +01001260static inline bool ieee80211_vif_is_mesh(struct ieee80211_vif *vif)
1261{
1262#ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_MESH
Johannes Berg05c914f2008-09-11 00:01:58 +02001263 return vif->type == NL80211_IFTYPE_MESH_POINT;
Johannes Berg902acc72008-02-23 15:17:19 +01001264#endif
1265 return false;
1266}
1267
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01001268/**
Johannes Bergad7e7182013-11-13 13:37:47 +01001269 * wdev_to_ieee80211_vif - return a vif struct from a wdev
1270 * @wdev: the wdev to get the vif for
1271 *
1272 * This can be used by mac80211 drivers with direct cfg80211 APIs
1273 * (like the vendor commands) that get a wdev.
1274 *
1275 * Note that this function may return %NULL if the given wdev isn't
1276 * associated with a vif that the driver knows about (e.g. monitor
1277 * or AP_VLAN interfaces.)
1278 */
1279struct ieee80211_vif *wdev_to_ieee80211_vif(struct wireless_dev *wdev);
1280
1281/**
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001282 * enum ieee80211_key_flags - key flags
1283 *
1284 * These flags are used for communication about keys between the driver
1285 * and mac80211, with the @flags parameter of &struct ieee80211_key_conf.
1286 *
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001287 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV: This flag should be set by the
1288 * driver to indicate that it requires IV generation for this
Ido Yarivdb128472015-01-06 08:39:02 -05001289 * particular key. Setting this flag does not necessarily mean that SKBs
1290 * will have sufficient tailroom for ICV or MIC.
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001291 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_MMIC: This flag should be set by
1292 * the driver for a TKIP key if it requires Michael MIC
1293 * generation in software.
Ivo van Doornc6adbd22008-04-17 21:11:18 +02001294 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PAIRWISE: Set by mac80211, this flag indicates
1295 * that the key is pairwise rather then a shared key.
Johannes Berge548c492012-09-04 17:08:23 +02001296 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_SW_MGMT_TX: This flag should be set by the driver for a
Jouni Malinen00b9cfa2015-01-24 19:52:06 +02001297 * CCMP/GCMP key if it requires CCMP/GCMP encryption of management frames
1298 * (MFP) to be done in software.
Arik Nemtsov077a9152011-10-23 08:21:41 +02001299 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PUT_IV_SPACE: This flag should be set by the driver
Janusz.Dziedzic@tieto.comee701082012-05-09 08:11:20 +03001300 * if space should be prepared for the IV, but the IV
Arik Nemtsov077a9152011-10-23 08:21:41 +02001301 * itself should not be generated. Do not set together with
Ido Yarivdb128472015-01-06 08:39:02 -05001302 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV on the same key. Setting this flag does
1303 * not necessarily mean that SKBs will have sufficient tailroom for ICV or
1304 * MIC.
Johannes Berge548c492012-09-04 17:08:23 +02001305 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_RX_MGMT: This key will be used to decrypt received
1306 * management frames. The flag can help drivers that have a hardware
1307 * crypto implementation that doesn't deal with management frames
1308 * properly by allowing them to not upload the keys to hardware and
1309 * fall back to software crypto. Note that this flag deals only with
1310 * RX, if your crypto engine can't deal with TX you can also set the
1311 * %IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_SW_MGMT_TX flag to encrypt such frames in SW.
Marek Kwaczynski17d38fa2014-04-14 11:27:21 +02001312 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV_MGMT: This flag should be set by the
Jouni Malinen00b9cfa2015-01-24 19:52:06 +02001313 * driver for a CCMP/GCMP key to indicate that is requires IV generation
Marek Kwaczynski17d38fa2014-04-14 11:27:21 +02001314 * only for managment frames (MFP).
Ido Yarivdb128472015-01-06 08:39:02 -05001315 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_RESERVE_TAILROOM: This flag should be set by the
1316 * driver for a key to indicate that sufficient tailroom must always
1317 * be reserved for ICV or MIC, even when HW encryption is enabled.
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001318 */
1319enum ieee80211_key_flags {
Marek Kwaczynski17d38fa2014-04-14 11:27:21 +02001320 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV_MGMT = BIT(0),
1321 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV = BIT(1),
1322 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_MMIC = BIT(2),
1323 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PAIRWISE = BIT(3),
1324 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_SW_MGMT_TX = BIT(4),
1325 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PUT_IV_SPACE = BIT(5),
1326 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_RX_MGMT = BIT(6),
Ido Yarivdb128472015-01-06 08:39:02 -05001327 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_RESERVE_TAILROOM = BIT(7),
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001328};
1329
1330/**
1331 * struct ieee80211_key_conf - key information
1332 *
1333 * This key information is given by mac80211 to the driver by
1334 * the set_key() callback in &struct ieee80211_ops.
1335 *
1336 * @hw_key_idx: To be set by the driver, this is the key index the driver
1337 * wants to be given when a frame is transmitted and needs to be
Johannes Berg6a7664d2007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001338 * encrypted in hardware.
Johannes Berg97359d12010-08-10 09:46:38 +02001339 * @cipher: The key's cipher suite selector.
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001340 * @flags: key flags, see &enum ieee80211_key_flags.
1341 * @keyidx: the key index (0-3)
1342 * @keylen: key material length
Luis R. Rodriguezffd78912008-06-21 10:02:46 -04001343 * @key: key material. For ALG_TKIP the key is encoded as a 256-bit (32 byte)
1344 * data block:
1345 * - Temporal Encryption Key (128 bits)
1346 * - Temporal Authenticator Tx MIC Key (64 bits)
1347 * - Temporal Authenticator Rx MIC Key (64 bits)
Johannes Bergdc822b52008-12-29 12:55:09 +01001348 * @icv_len: The ICV length for this key type
1349 * @iv_len: The IV length for this key type
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001350 */
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07001351struct ieee80211_key_conf {
Johannes Berg97359d12010-08-10 09:46:38 +02001352 u32 cipher;
Felix Fietkau76708de2008-10-05 18:02:48 +02001353 u8 icv_len;
1354 u8 iv_len;
Johannes Berg6a7664d2007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001355 u8 hw_key_idx;
Johannes Berg11a843b2007-08-28 17:01:55 -04001356 u8 flags;
Johannes Berg11a843b2007-08-28 17:01:55 -04001357 s8 keyidx;
Johannes Berg11a843b2007-08-28 17:01:55 -04001358 u8 keylen;
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07001359 u8 key[0];
1360};
1361
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001362/**
Max Stepanov2475b1cc2013-03-24 14:23:27 +02001363 * struct ieee80211_cipher_scheme - cipher scheme
1364 *
1365 * This structure contains a cipher scheme information defining
1366 * the secure packet crypto handling.
1367 *
1368 * @cipher: a cipher suite selector
1369 * @iftype: a cipher iftype bit mask indicating an allowed cipher usage
1370 * @hdr_len: a length of a security header used the cipher
1371 * @pn_len: a length of a packet number in the security header
1372 * @pn_off: an offset of pn from the beginning of the security header
1373 * @key_idx_off: an offset of key index byte in the security header
1374 * @key_idx_mask: a bit mask of key_idx bits
1375 * @key_idx_shift: a bit shift needed to get key_idx
1376 * key_idx value calculation:
1377 * (sec_header_base[key_idx_off] & key_idx_mask) >> key_idx_shift
1378 * @mic_len: a mic length in bytes
1379 */
1380struct ieee80211_cipher_scheme {
1381 u32 cipher;
1382 u16 iftype;
1383 u8 hdr_len;
1384 u8 pn_len;
1385 u8 pn_off;
1386 u8 key_idx_off;
1387 u8 key_idx_mask;
1388 u8 key_idx_shift;
1389 u8 mic_len;
1390};
1391
1392/**
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001393 * enum set_key_cmd - key command
1394 *
1395 * Used with the set_key() callback in &struct ieee80211_ops, this
1396 * indicates whether a key is being removed or added.
1397 *
1398 * @SET_KEY: a key is set
1399 * @DISABLE_KEY: a key must be disabled
1400 */
Johannes Bergea49c352007-09-18 17:29:21 -04001401enum set_key_cmd {
Johannes Berg11a843b2007-08-28 17:01:55 -04001402 SET_KEY, DISABLE_KEY,
Johannes Bergea49c352007-09-18 17:29:21 -04001403};
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07001404
Tomas Winkler478f8d22007-09-30 13:52:37 +02001405/**
Johannes Bergf09603a2012-01-20 13:55:21 +01001406 * enum ieee80211_sta_state - station state
1407 *
1408 * @IEEE80211_STA_NOTEXIST: station doesn't exist at all,
1409 * this is a special state for add/remove transitions
1410 * @IEEE80211_STA_NONE: station exists without special state
1411 * @IEEE80211_STA_AUTH: station is authenticated
1412 * @IEEE80211_STA_ASSOC: station is associated
1413 * @IEEE80211_STA_AUTHORIZED: station is authorized (802.1X)
1414 */
1415enum ieee80211_sta_state {
1416 /* NOTE: These need to be ordered correctly! */
1417 IEEE80211_STA_NOTEXIST,
1418 IEEE80211_STA_NONE,
1419 IEEE80211_STA_AUTH,
1420 IEEE80211_STA_ASSOC,
1421 IEEE80211_STA_AUTHORIZED,
1422};
1423
1424/**
Johannes Berge1a0c6b2013-02-07 11:47:44 +01001425 * enum ieee80211_sta_rx_bandwidth - station RX bandwidth
1426 * @IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_20: station can only receive 20 MHz
1427 * @IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_40: station can receive up to 40 MHz
1428 * @IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_80: station can receive up to 80 MHz
1429 * @IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_160: station can receive up to 160 MHz
1430 * (including 80+80 MHz)
1431 *
1432 * Implementation note: 20 must be zero to be initialized
1433 * correctly, the values must be sorted.
1434 */
1435enum ieee80211_sta_rx_bandwidth {
1436 IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_20 = 0,
1437 IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_40,
1438 IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_80,
1439 IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_160,
1440};
1441
1442/**
Felix Fietkau0d528d82013-04-22 16:14:41 +02001443 * struct ieee80211_sta_rates - station rate selection table
1444 *
1445 * @rcu_head: RCU head used for freeing the table on update
Robert P. J. Day03f831a2013-05-02 07:15:09 -04001446 * @rate: transmit rates/flags to be used by default.
Felix Fietkau0d528d82013-04-22 16:14:41 +02001447 * Overriding entries per-packet is possible by using cb tx control.
1448 */
1449struct ieee80211_sta_rates {
1450 struct rcu_head rcu_head;
1451 struct {
1452 s8 idx;
1453 u8 count;
1454 u8 count_cts;
1455 u8 count_rts;
1456 u16 flags;
1457 } rate[IEEE80211_TX_RATE_TABLE_SIZE];
1458};
1459
1460/**
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02001461 * struct ieee80211_sta - station table entry
1462 *
1463 * A station table entry represents a station we are possibly
1464 * communicating with. Since stations are RCU-managed in
1465 * mac80211, any ieee80211_sta pointer you get access to must
1466 * either be protected by rcu_read_lock() explicitly or implicitly,
1467 * or you must take good care to not use such a pointer after a
Johannes Berg34e89502010-02-03 13:59:58 +01001468 * call to your sta_remove callback that removed it.
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02001469 *
1470 * @addr: MAC address
1471 * @aid: AID we assigned to the station if we're an AP
Johannes Berg323ce792008-09-11 02:45:11 +02001472 * @supp_rates: Bitmap of supported rates (per band)
Johannes Berg55d942f2013-03-01 13:07:48 +01001473 * @ht_cap: HT capabilities of this STA; restricted to our own capabilities
1474 * @vht_cap: VHT capabilities of this STA; restricted to our own capabilities
Johannes Berga74a8c82014-07-22 14:50:47 +02001475 * @wme: indicates whether the STA supports QoS/WME.
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02001476 * @drv_priv: data area for driver use, will always be aligned to
1477 * sizeof(void *), size is determined in hw information.
Eliad Peller910868d2011-09-11 09:46:55 +03001478 * @uapsd_queues: bitmap of queues configured for uapsd. Only valid
1479 * if wme is supported.
1480 * @max_sp: max Service Period. Only valid if wme is supported.
Johannes Berge1a0c6b2013-02-07 11:47:44 +01001481 * @bandwidth: current bandwidth the station can receive with
Johannes Berg8921d042012-12-27 18:26:42 +01001482 * @rx_nss: in HT/VHT, the maximum number of spatial streams the
1483 * station can receive at the moment, changed by operating mode
1484 * notifications and capabilities. The value is only valid after
1485 * the station moves to associated state.
Johannes Bergaf0ed692013-02-12 14:21:00 +01001486 * @smps_mode: current SMPS mode (off, static or dynamic)
Robert P. J. Day03f831a2013-05-02 07:15:09 -04001487 * @rates: rate control selection table
Arik Nemtsov0c4972c2014-05-01 10:17:27 +03001488 * @tdls: indicates whether the STA is a TDLS peer
Arik Nemtsov8b941482014-10-22 12:32:48 +03001489 * @tdls_initiator: indicates the STA is an initiator of the TDLS link. Only
1490 * valid if the STA is a TDLS peer in the first place.
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02001491 */
1492struct ieee80211_sta {
Johannes Berg881d9482009-01-21 15:13:48 +01001493 u32 supp_rates[IEEE80211_NUM_BANDS];
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02001494 u8 addr[ETH_ALEN];
1495 u16 aid;
Johannes Bergd9fe60d2008-10-09 12:13:49 +02001496 struct ieee80211_sta_ht_cap ht_cap;
Mahesh Palivela818255e2012-10-10 11:33:04 +00001497 struct ieee80211_sta_vht_cap vht_cap;
Arik Nemtsov39df6002011-06-27 23:58:45 +03001498 bool wme;
Eliad Peller9533b4a2011-08-23 14:37:47 +03001499 u8 uapsd_queues;
1500 u8 max_sp;
Johannes Berg8921d042012-12-27 18:26:42 +01001501 u8 rx_nss;
Johannes Berge1a0c6b2013-02-07 11:47:44 +01001502 enum ieee80211_sta_rx_bandwidth bandwidth;
Johannes Bergaf0ed692013-02-12 14:21:00 +01001503 enum ieee80211_smps_mode smps_mode;
Felix Fietkau0d528d82013-04-22 16:14:41 +02001504 struct ieee80211_sta_rates __rcu *rates;
Arik Nemtsov0c4972c2014-05-01 10:17:27 +03001505 bool tdls;
Arik Nemtsov8b941482014-10-22 12:32:48 +03001506 bool tdls_initiator;
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02001507
1508 /* must be last */
Johannes Berg1c06ef92012-12-28 12:22:02 +01001509 u8 drv_priv[0] __aligned(sizeof(void *));
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02001510};
1511
1512/**
Tomas Winkler478f8d22007-09-30 13:52:37 +02001513 * enum sta_notify_cmd - sta notify command
1514 *
1515 * Used with the sta_notify() callback in &struct ieee80211_ops, this
Sujith38a6cc72010-05-19 11:32:30 +05301516 * indicates if an associated station made a power state transition.
Tomas Winkler478f8d22007-09-30 13:52:37 +02001517 *
Christian Lamparter4571d3b2008-11-30 00:48:41 +01001518 * @STA_NOTIFY_SLEEP: a station is now sleeping
1519 * @STA_NOTIFY_AWAKE: a sleeping station woke up
1520 */
Christian Lamparter89fad572008-12-09 16:28:06 +01001521enum sta_notify_cmd {
Christian Lamparter4571d3b2008-11-30 00:48:41 +01001522 STA_NOTIFY_SLEEP, STA_NOTIFY_AWAKE,
1523};
1524
1525/**
Thomas Huehn36323f82012-07-23 21:33:42 +02001526 * struct ieee80211_tx_control - TX control data
1527 *
1528 * @sta: station table entry, this sta pointer may be NULL and
1529 * it is not allowed to copy the pointer, due to RCU.
1530 */
1531struct ieee80211_tx_control {
1532 struct ieee80211_sta *sta;
1533};
1534
1535/**
Johannes Berg1bc08262007-09-18 17:29:15 -04001536 * enum ieee80211_hw_flags - hardware flags
1537 *
1538 * These flags are used to indicate hardware capabilities to
1539 * the stack. Generally, flags here should have their meaning
1540 * done in a way that the simplest hardware doesn't need setting
1541 * any particular flags. There are some exceptions to this rule,
1542 * however, so you are advised to review these flags carefully.
1543 *
Johannes Bergaf65cd962009-11-17 18:18:36 +01001544 * @IEEE80211_HW_HAS_RATE_CONTROL:
1545 * The hardware or firmware includes rate control, and cannot be
1546 * controlled by the stack. As such, no rate control algorithm
1547 * should be instantiated, and the TX rate reported to userspace
1548 * will be taken from the TX status instead of the rate control
1549 * algorithm.
1550 * Note that this requires that the driver implement a number of
1551 * callbacks so it has the correct information, it needs to have
1552 * the @set_rts_threshold callback and must look at the BSS config
1553 * @use_cts_prot for G/N protection, @use_short_slot for slot
1554 * timing in 2.4 GHz and @use_short_preamble for preambles for
1555 * CCK frames.
1556 *
Johannes Berg1bc08262007-09-18 17:29:15 -04001557 * @IEEE80211_HW_RX_INCLUDES_FCS:
1558 * Indicates that received frames passed to the stack include
1559 * the FCS at the end.
1560 *
1561 * @IEEE80211_HW_HOST_BROADCAST_PS_BUFFERING:
1562 * Some wireless LAN chipsets buffer broadcast/multicast frames
1563 * for power saving stations in the hardware/firmware and others
1564 * rely on the host system for such buffering. This option is used
1565 * to configure the IEEE 802.11 upper layer to buffer broadcast and
1566 * multicast frames when there are power saving stations so that
Luis R. Rodriguez546c80c92008-08-14 11:43:20 -07001567 * the driver can fetch them with ieee80211_get_buffered_bc().
Johannes Berg1bc08262007-09-18 17:29:15 -04001568 *
Johannes Berg8318d782008-01-24 19:38:38 +01001569 * @IEEE80211_HW_2GHZ_SHORT_SLOT_INCAPABLE:
1570 * Hardware is not capable of short slot operation on the 2.4 GHz band.
1571 *
1572 * @IEEE80211_HW_2GHZ_SHORT_PREAMBLE_INCAPABLE:
1573 * Hardware is not capable of receiving frames with short preamble on
1574 * the 2.4 GHz band.
Bruno Randolf566bfe52008-05-08 19:15:40 +02001575 *
1576 * @IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_UNSPEC:
1577 * Hardware can provide signal values but we don't know its units. We
1578 * expect values between 0 and @max_signal.
1579 * If possible please provide dB or dBm instead.
1580 *
Bruno Randolf566bfe52008-05-08 19:15:40 +02001581 * @IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_DBM:
1582 * Hardware gives signal values in dBm, decibel difference from
1583 * one milliwatt. This is the preferred method since it is standardized
1584 * between different devices. @max_signal does not need to be set.
1585 *
Tomas Winkler06ff47b2008-06-18 17:53:44 +03001586 * @IEEE80211_HW_SPECTRUM_MGMT:
1587 * Hardware supports spectrum management defined in 802.11h
1588 * Measurement, Channel Switch, Quieting, TPC
Sujith8b30b1f2008-10-24 09:55:27 +05301589 *
1590 * @IEEE80211_HW_AMPDU_AGGREGATION:
1591 * Hardware supports 11n A-MPDU aggregation.
Kalle Valo520eb822008-12-18 23:35:27 +02001592 *
Johannes Berg4be8c382009-01-07 18:28:20 +01001593 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PS:
1594 * Hardware has power save support (i.e. can go to sleep).
1595 *
1596 * @IEEE80211_HW_PS_NULLFUNC_STACK:
1597 * Hardware requires nullfunc frame handling in stack, implies
1598 * stack support for dynamic PS.
1599 *
1600 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_DYNAMIC_PS:
1601 * Hardware has support for dynamic PS.
Jouni Malinen4375d082009-01-08 13:32:11 +02001602 *
1603 * @IEEE80211_HW_MFP_CAPABLE:
1604 * Hardware supports management frame protection (MFP, IEEE 802.11w).
Kalle Valo04de8382009-03-22 21:57:35 +02001605 *
Vivek Natarajan375177b2010-02-09 14:50:28 +05301606 * @IEEE80211_HW_REPORTS_TX_ACK_STATUS:
1607 * Hardware can provide ack status reports of Tx frames to
1608 * the stack.
1609 *
Juuso Oikarinen1e4dcd02010-03-19 07:14:53 +02001610 * @IEEE80211_HW_CONNECTION_MONITOR:
Johannes Bergad24b0d2013-07-05 11:53:28 +02001611 * The hardware performs its own connection monitoring, including
1612 * periodic keep-alives to the AP and probing the AP on beacon loss.
Juuso Oikarinena97c13c2010-03-23 09:02:34 +02001613 *
Emmanuel Grumbachc65dd142012-12-12 10:12:24 +02001614 * @IEEE80211_HW_NEED_DTIM_BEFORE_ASSOC:
1615 * This device needs to get data from beacon before association (i.e.
1616 * dtim_period).
Johannes Berge31b8212010-10-05 19:39:30 +02001617 *
1618 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PER_STA_GTK: The device's crypto engine supports
1619 * per-station GTKs as used by IBSS RSN or during fast transition. If
1620 * the device doesn't support per-station GTKs, but can be asked not
1621 * to decrypt group addressed frames, then IBSS RSN support is still
1622 * possible but software crypto will be used. Advertise the wiphy flag
1623 * only in that case.
Arik Nemtsovd057e5a2011-01-31 22:29:13 +02001624 *
1625 * @IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS: When operating in AP mode the device
1626 * autonomously manages the PS status of connected stations. When
1627 * this flag is set mac80211 will not trigger PS mode for connected
1628 * stations based on the PM bit of incoming frames.
1629 * Use ieee80211_start_ps()/ieee8021_end_ps() to manually configure
1630 * the PS mode of connected stations.
Arik Nemtsovedf6b782011-08-30 09:32:38 +03001631 *
1632 * @IEEE80211_HW_TX_AMPDU_SETUP_IN_HW: The device handles TX A-MPDU session
1633 * setup strictly in HW. mac80211 should not attempt to do this in
1634 * software.
Eliad Peller885bd8e2012-02-02 17:44:55 +02001635 *
Johannes Berg4b6f1dd2012-04-03 14:35:57 +02001636 * @IEEE80211_HW_WANT_MONITOR_VIF: The driver would like to be informed of
1637 * a virtual monitor interface when monitor interfaces are the only
1638 * active interfaces.
Johannes Berg3a25a8c2012-04-03 16:28:50 +02001639 *
Ben Greeare27513f2014-10-22 12:23:03 -07001640 * @IEEE80211_HW_NO_AUTO_VIF: The driver would like for no wlanX to
1641 * be created. It is expected user-space will create vifs as
1642 * desired (and thus have them named as desired).
1643 *
Johannes Bergfa7e1fb2015-01-22 18:44:19 +01001644 * @IEEE80211_HW_SW_CRYPTO_CONTROL: The driver wants to control which of the
1645 * crypto algorithms can be done in software - so don't automatically
1646 * try to fall back to it if hardware crypto fails, but do so only if
1647 * the driver returns 1. This also forces the driver to advertise its
1648 * supported cipher suites.
1649 *
Johannes Berg3a25a8c2012-04-03 16:28:50 +02001650 * @IEEE80211_HW_QUEUE_CONTROL: The driver wants to control per-interface
1651 * queue mapping in order to use different queues (not just one per AC)
1652 * for different virtual interfaces. See the doc section on HW queue
1653 * control for more details.
Johannes Berg6d711172012-06-19 17:19:44 +02001654 *
Felix Fietkau0d528d82013-04-22 16:14:41 +02001655 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_RC_TABLE: The driver supports using a rate
1656 * selection table provided by the rate control algorithm.
1657 *
Johannes Berg6d711172012-06-19 17:19:44 +02001658 * @IEEE80211_HW_P2P_DEV_ADDR_FOR_INTF: Use the P2P Device address for any
1659 * P2P Interface. This will be honoured even if more than one interface
1660 * is supported.
Johannes Bergef429da2013-02-05 17:48:40 +01001661 *
1662 * @IEEE80211_HW_TIMING_BEACON_ONLY: Use sync timing from beacon frames
1663 * only, to allow getting TBTT of a DTIM beacon.
Arik Nemtsov7578d572013-09-01 17:15:51 +03001664 *
Johannes Berg919be622013-10-14 10:05:16 +02001665 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_HT_CCK_RATES: Hardware supports mixing HT/CCK rates
1666 * and can cope with CCK rates in an aggregation session (e.g. by not
1667 * using aggregation for such frames.)
1668 *
Arik Nemtsov7578d572013-09-01 17:15:51 +03001669 * @IEEE80211_HW_CHANCTX_STA_CSA: Support 802.11h based channel-switch (CSA)
1670 * for a single active channel while using channel contexts. When support
1671 * is not enabled the default action is to disconnect when getting the
1672 * CSA frame.
Luciano Coelho5d52ee82014-02-27 14:33:47 +02001673 *
Ido Yarivc70f59a2014-07-29 15:39:14 +03001674 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_CLONED_SKBS: The driver will never modify the payload
1675 * or tailroom of TX skbs without copying them first.
1676 *
David Spinadelc56ef672014-02-05 15:21:13 +02001677 * @IEEE80211_SINGLE_HW_SCAN_ON_ALL_BANDS: The HW supports scanning on all bands
1678 * in one command, mac80211 doesn't have to run separate scans per band.
Johannes Berg1bc08262007-09-18 17:29:15 -04001679 */
1680enum ieee80211_hw_flags {
Johannes Bergaf65cd962009-11-17 18:18:36 +01001681 IEEE80211_HW_HAS_RATE_CONTROL = 1<<0,
Johannes Berg1bc08262007-09-18 17:29:15 -04001682 IEEE80211_HW_RX_INCLUDES_FCS = 1<<1,
1683 IEEE80211_HW_HOST_BROADCAST_PS_BUFFERING = 1<<2,
Johannes Berg8318d782008-01-24 19:38:38 +01001684 IEEE80211_HW_2GHZ_SHORT_SLOT_INCAPABLE = 1<<3,
1685 IEEE80211_HW_2GHZ_SHORT_PREAMBLE_INCAPABLE = 1<<4,
Bruno Randolf566bfe52008-05-08 19:15:40 +02001686 IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_UNSPEC = 1<<5,
Johannes Berg7fee5372009-01-30 11:13:06 +01001687 IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_DBM = 1<<6,
Emmanuel Grumbachc65dd142012-12-12 10:12:24 +02001688 IEEE80211_HW_NEED_DTIM_BEFORE_ASSOC = 1<<7,
Johannes Berg7fee5372009-01-30 11:13:06 +01001689 IEEE80211_HW_SPECTRUM_MGMT = 1<<8,
1690 IEEE80211_HW_AMPDU_AGGREGATION = 1<<9,
1691 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PS = 1<<10,
1692 IEEE80211_HW_PS_NULLFUNC_STACK = 1<<11,
1693 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_DYNAMIC_PS = 1<<12,
1694 IEEE80211_HW_MFP_CAPABLE = 1<<13,
Johannes Berg4b6f1dd2012-04-03 14:35:57 +02001695 IEEE80211_HW_WANT_MONITOR_VIF = 1<<14,
Ben Greeare27513f2014-10-22 12:23:03 -07001696 IEEE80211_HW_NO_AUTO_VIF = 1<<15,
Johannes Bergfa7e1fb2015-01-22 18:44:19 +01001697 IEEE80211_HW_SW_CRYPTO_CONTROL = 1<<16,
Johannes Berg848955c2014-11-11 12:48:42 +01001698 /* free slots */
Vivek Natarajan375177b2010-02-09 14:50:28 +05301699 IEEE80211_HW_REPORTS_TX_ACK_STATUS = 1<<18,
Juuso Oikarinen1e4dcd02010-03-19 07:14:53 +02001700 IEEE80211_HW_CONNECTION_MONITOR = 1<<19,
Johannes Berg3a25a8c2012-04-03 16:28:50 +02001701 IEEE80211_HW_QUEUE_CONTROL = 1<<20,
Johannes Berge31b8212010-10-05 19:39:30 +02001702 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PER_STA_GTK = 1<<21,
Arik Nemtsovd057e5a2011-01-31 22:29:13 +02001703 IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS = 1<<22,
Arik Nemtsovedf6b782011-08-30 09:32:38 +03001704 IEEE80211_HW_TX_AMPDU_SETUP_IN_HW = 1<<23,
Felix Fietkau0d528d82013-04-22 16:14:41 +02001705 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_RC_TABLE = 1<<24,
Johannes Berg6d711172012-06-19 17:19:44 +02001706 IEEE80211_HW_P2P_DEV_ADDR_FOR_INTF = 1<<25,
Johannes Bergef429da2013-02-05 17:48:40 +01001707 IEEE80211_HW_TIMING_BEACON_ONLY = 1<<26,
Felix Fietkau2dfca312013-08-20 19:43:54 +02001708 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_HT_CCK_RATES = 1<<27,
Arik Nemtsov7578d572013-09-01 17:15:51 +03001709 IEEE80211_HW_CHANCTX_STA_CSA = 1<<28,
Ido Yarivc70f59a2014-07-29 15:39:14 +03001710 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_CLONED_SKBS = 1<<29,
David Spinadelc56ef672014-02-05 15:21:13 +02001711 IEEE80211_SINGLE_HW_SCAN_ON_ALL_BANDS = 1<<30,
Johannes Berg1bc08262007-09-18 17:29:15 -04001712};
1713
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001714/**
1715 * struct ieee80211_hw - hardware information and state
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04001716 *
1717 * This structure contains the configuration and hardware
1718 * information for an 802.11 PHY.
1719 *
1720 * @wiphy: This points to the &struct wiphy allocated for this
1721 * 802.11 PHY. You must fill in the @perm_addr and @dev
1722 * members of this structure using SET_IEEE80211_DEV()
Johannes Berg8318d782008-01-24 19:38:38 +01001723 * and SET_IEEE80211_PERM_ADDR(). Additionally, all supported
1724 * bands (with channels, bitrates) are registered here.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04001725 *
1726 * @conf: &struct ieee80211_conf, device configuration, don't use.
1727 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04001728 * @priv: pointer to private area that was allocated for driver use
1729 * along with this structure.
1730 *
1731 * @flags: hardware flags, see &enum ieee80211_hw_flags.
1732 *
1733 * @extra_tx_headroom: headroom to reserve in each transmit skb
1734 * for use by the driver (e.g. for transmit headers.)
1735 *
Felix Fietkau70dabeb2013-12-14 13:54:53 +01001736 * @extra_beacon_tailroom: tailroom to reserve in each beacon tx skb.
1737 * Can be used by drivers to add extra IEs.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04001738 *
Bruno Randolf566bfe52008-05-08 19:15:40 +02001739 * @max_signal: Maximum value for signal (rssi) in RX information, used
Johannes Bergad24b0d2013-07-05 11:53:28 +02001740 * only when @IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_UNSPEC or @IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_DB
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04001741 *
Tomas Winklerea95bba2008-07-18 13:53:00 +08001742 * @max_listen_interval: max listen interval in units of beacon interval
Johannes Bergad24b0d2013-07-05 11:53:28 +02001743 * that HW supports
Tomas Winklerea95bba2008-07-18 13:53:00 +08001744 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04001745 * @queues: number of available hardware transmit queues for
Johannes Berge100bb62008-04-30 18:51:21 +02001746 * data packets. WMM/QoS requires at least four, these
1747 * queues need to have configurable access parameters.
1748 *
Johannes Berg830f9032007-10-28 14:51:05 +01001749 * @rate_control_algorithm: rate control algorithm for this hardware.
1750 * If unset (NULL), the default algorithm will be used. Must be
1751 * set before calling ieee80211_register_hw().
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01001752 *
1753 * @vif_data_size: size (in bytes) of the drv_priv data area
1754 * within &struct ieee80211_vif.
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02001755 * @sta_data_size: size (in bytes) of the drv_priv data area
1756 * within &struct ieee80211_sta.
Michal Kaziord01a1e62012-06-26 14:37:16 +02001757 * @chanctx_data_size: size (in bytes) of the drv_priv data area
1758 * within &struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf.
Felix Fietkau870abdf2008-10-05 18:04:24 +02001759 *
Helmut Schaa78be49e2010-10-02 11:31:55 +02001760 * @max_rates: maximum number of alternate rate retry stages the hw
1761 * can handle.
1762 * @max_report_rates: maximum number of alternate rate retry stages
1763 * the hw can report back.
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +02001764 * @max_rate_tries: maximum number of tries for each stage
John W. Linville4e6cbfd2010-07-29 16:14:13 -04001765 *
Luciano Coelhodf6ba5d2011-01-12 15:26:30 +02001766 * @max_rx_aggregation_subframes: maximum buffer size (number of
1767 * sub-frames) to be used for A-MPDU block ack receiver
1768 * aggregation.
1769 * This is only relevant if the device has restrictions on the
1770 * number of subframes, if it relies on mac80211 to do reordering
1771 * it shouldn't be set.
Johannes Berg5dd36bc2011-01-18 13:52:23 +01001772 *
1773 * @max_tx_aggregation_subframes: maximum number of subframes in an
1774 * aggregate an HT driver will transmit, used by the peer as a
1775 * hint to size its reorder buffer.
Johannes Berg3a25a8c2012-04-03 16:28:50 +02001776 *
1777 * @offchannel_tx_hw_queue: HW queue ID to use for offchannel TX
1778 * (if %IEEE80211_HW_QUEUE_CONTROL is set)
Johannes Bergac55d2f2012-05-10 09:09:10 +02001779 *
1780 * @radiotap_mcs_details: lists which MCS information can the HW
1781 * reports, by default it is set to _MCS, _GI and _BW but doesn't
1782 * include _FMT. Use %IEEE80211_RADIOTAP_MCS_HAVE_* values, only
1783 * adding _BW is supported today.
Arik Nemtsov72d78722012-05-10 16:18:26 +03001784 *
Johannes Berg51648922012-11-22 23:00:18 +01001785 * @radiotap_vht_details: lists which VHT MCS information the HW reports,
1786 * the default is _GI | _BANDWIDTH.
1787 * Use the %IEEE80211_RADIOTAP_VHT_KNOWN_* values.
1788 *
Arik Nemtsov72d78722012-05-10 16:18:26 +03001789 * @netdev_features: netdev features to be set in each netdev created
1790 * from this HW. Note only HW checksum features are currently
1791 * compatible with mac80211. Other feature bits will be rejected.
Alexander Bondar219c3862013-01-22 16:52:23 +02001792 *
1793 * @uapsd_queues: This bitmap is included in (re)association frame to indicate
1794 * for each access category if it is uAPSD trigger-enabled and delivery-
1795 * enabled. Use IEEE80211_WMM_IE_STA_QOSINFO_AC_* to set this bitmap.
1796 * Each bit corresponds to different AC. Value '1' in specific bit means
1797 * that corresponding AC is both trigger- and delivery-enabled. '0' means
1798 * neither enabled.
1799 *
1800 * @uapsd_max_sp_len: maximum number of total buffered frames the WMM AP may
1801 * deliver to a WMM STA during any Service Period triggered by the WMM STA.
1802 * Use IEEE80211_WMM_IE_STA_QOSINFO_SP_* for correct values.
Max Stepanov2475b1cc2013-03-24 14:23:27 +02001803 *
1804 * @n_cipher_schemes: a size of an array of cipher schemes definitions.
1805 * @cipher_schemes: a pointer to an array of cipher scheme definitions
1806 * supported by HW.
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001807 */
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07001808struct ieee80211_hw {
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07001809 struct ieee80211_conf conf;
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04001810 struct wiphy *wiphy;
Johannes Berg830f9032007-10-28 14:51:05 +01001811 const char *rate_control_algorithm;
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07001812 void *priv;
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04001813 u32 flags;
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07001814 unsigned int extra_tx_headroom;
Felix Fietkau70dabeb2013-12-14 13:54:53 +01001815 unsigned int extra_beacon_tailroom;
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01001816 int vif_data_size;
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02001817 int sta_data_size;
Michal Kaziord01a1e62012-06-26 14:37:16 +02001818 int chanctx_data_size;
Tomas Winklerea95bba2008-07-18 13:53:00 +08001819 u16 queues;
Tomas Winklerea95bba2008-07-18 13:53:00 +08001820 u16 max_listen_interval;
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07001821 s8 max_signal;
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +02001822 u8 max_rates;
Helmut Schaa78be49e2010-10-02 11:31:55 +02001823 u8 max_report_rates;
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +02001824 u8 max_rate_tries;
Luciano Coelhodf6ba5d2011-01-12 15:26:30 +02001825 u8 max_rx_aggregation_subframes;
Johannes Berg5dd36bc2011-01-18 13:52:23 +01001826 u8 max_tx_aggregation_subframes;
Johannes Berg3a25a8c2012-04-03 16:28:50 +02001827 u8 offchannel_tx_hw_queue;
Johannes Bergac55d2f2012-05-10 09:09:10 +02001828 u8 radiotap_mcs_details;
Johannes Berg51648922012-11-22 23:00:18 +01001829 u16 radiotap_vht_details;
Arik Nemtsov72d78722012-05-10 16:18:26 +03001830 netdev_features_t netdev_features;
Alexander Bondar219c3862013-01-22 16:52:23 +02001831 u8 uapsd_queues;
1832 u8 uapsd_max_sp_len;
Max Stepanov2475b1cc2013-03-24 14:23:27 +02001833 u8 n_cipher_schemes;
1834 const struct ieee80211_cipher_scheme *cipher_schemes;
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07001835};
1836
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04001837/**
David Spinadelc56ef672014-02-05 15:21:13 +02001838 * struct ieee80211_scan_request - hw scan request
1839 *
1840 * @ies: pointers different parts of IEs (in req.ie)
1841 * @req: cfg80211 request.
1842 */
1843struct ieee80211_scan_request {
1844 struct ieee80211_scan_ies ies;
1845
1846 /* Keep last */
1847 struct cfg80211_scan_request req;
1848};
1849
1850/**
Arik Nemtsov8a4d32f2014-11-09 18:50:20 +02001851 * struct ieee80211_tdls_ch_sw_params - TDLS channel switch parameters
1852 *
1853 * @sta: peer this TDLS channel-switch request/response came from
1854 * @chandef: channel referenced in a TDLS channel-switch request
1855 * @action_code: see &enum ieee80211_tdls_actioncode
1856 * @status: channel-switch response status
1857 * @timestamp: time at which the frame was received
1858 * @switch_time: switch-timing parameter received in the frame
1859 * @switch_timeout: switch-timing parameter received in the frame
1860 * @tmpl_skb: TDLS switch-channel response template
1861 * @ch_sw_tm_ie: offset of the channel-switch timing IE inside @tmpl_skb
1862 */
1863struct ieee80211_tdls_ch_sw_params {
1864 struct ieee80211_sta *sta;
1865 struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef;
1866 u8 action_code;
1867 u32 status;
1868 u32 timestamp;
1869 u16 switch_time;
1870 u16 switch_timeout;
1871 struct sk_buff *tmpl_skb;
1872 u32 ch_sw_tm_ie;
1873};
1874
1875/**
Luis R. Rodriguez9a953712009-01-22 15:05:53 -08001876 * wiphy_to_ieee80211_hw - return a mac80211 driver hw struct from a wiphy
1877 *
1878 * @wiphy: the &struct wiphy which we want to query
1879 *
1880 * mac80211 drivers can use this to get to their respective
1881 * &struct ieee80211_hw. Drivers wishing to get to their own private
1882 * structure can then access it via hw->priv. Note that mac802111 drivers should
1883 * not use wiphy_priv() to try to get their private driver structure as this
1884 * is already used internally by mac80211.
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01001885 *
1886 * Return: The mac80211 driver hw struct of @wiphy.
Luis R. Rodriguez9a953712009-01-22 15:05:53 -08001887 */
1888struct ieee80211_hw *wiphy_to_ieee80211_hw(struct wiphy *wiphy);
1889
1890/**
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04001891 * SET_IEEE80211_DEV - set device for 802.11 hardware
1892 *
1893 * @hw: the &struct ieee80211_hw to set the device for
1894 * @dev: the &struct device of this 802.11 device
1895 */
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07001896static inline void SET_IEEE80211_DEV(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct device *dev)
1897{
1898 set_wiphy_dev(hw->wiphy, dev);
1899}
1900
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04001901/**
Bob Copelande37d4df2008-10-20 21:20:27 -04001902 * SET_IEEE80211_PERM_ADDR - set the permanent MAC address for 802.11 hardware
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04001903 *
1904 * @hw: the &struct ieee80211_hw to set the MAC address for
1905 * @addr: the address to set
1906 */
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07001907static inline void SET_IEEE80211_PERM_ADDR(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u8 *addr)
1908{
1909 memcpy(hw->wiphy->perm_addr, addr, ETH_ALEN);
1910}
1911
Johannes Berg2e92e6f2008-05-15 12:55:27 +02001912static inline struct ieee80211_rate *
1913ieee80211_get_tx_rate(const struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02001914 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *c)
Johannes Berg2e92e6f2008-05-15 12:55:27 +02001915{
Larry Fingeraa331df2012-04-06 16:35:53 -05001916 if (WARN_ON_ONCE(c->control.rates[0].idx < 0))
Johannes Berg2e92e6f2008-05-15 12:55:27 +02001917 return NULL;
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +02001918 return &hw->wiphy->bands[c->band]->bitrates[c->control.rates[0].idx];
Johannes Berg2e92e6f2008-05-15 12:55:27 +02001919}
1920
1921static inline struct ieee80211_rate *
1922ieee80211_get_rts_cts_rate(const struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02001923 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *c)
Johannes Berg2e92e6f2008-05-15 12:55:27 +02001924{
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02001925 if (c->control.rts_cts_rate_idx < 0)
Johannes Berg2e92e6f2008-05-15 12:55:27 +02001926 return NULL;
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02001927 return &hw->wiphy->bands[c->band]->bitrates[c->control.rts_cts_rate_idx];
Johannes Berg2e92e6f2008-05-15 12:55:27 +02001928}
1929
1930static inline struct ieee80211_rate *
1931ieee80211_get_alt_retry_rate(const struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Felix Fietkau870abdf2008-10-05 18:04:24 +02001932 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *c, int idx)
Johannes Berg2e92e6f2008-05-15 12:55:27 +02001933{
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +02001934 if (c->control.rates[idx + 1].idx < 0)
Johannes Berg2e92e6f2008-05-15 12:55:27 +02001935 return NULL;
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +02001936 return &hw->wiphy->bands[c->band]->bitrates[c->control.rates[idx + 1].idx];
Johannes Berg2e92e6f2008-05-15 12:55:27 +02001937}
1938
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04001939/**
Johannes Berg6096de72011-11-04 11:18:10 +01001940 * ieee80211_free_txskb - free TX skb
1941 * @hw: the hardware
1942 * @skb: the skb
1943 *
1944 * Free a transmit skb. Use this funtion when some failure
1945 * to transmit happened and thus status cannot be reported.
1946 */
1947void ieee80211_free_txskb(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct sk_buff *skb);
1948
1949/**
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04001950 * DOC: Hardware crypto acceleration
Johannes Berg4150c572007-09-17 01:29:23 -04001951 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04001952 * mac80211 is capable of taking advantage of many hardware
1953 * acceleration designs for encryption and decryption operations.
1954 *
1955 * The set_key() callback in the &struct ieee80211_ops for a given
1956 * device is called to enable hardware acceleration of encryption and
Johannes Bergdc822b52008-12-29 12:55:09 +01001957 * decryption. The callback takes a @sta parameter that will be NULL
1958 * for default keys or keys used for transmission only, or point to
1959 * the station information for the peer for individual keys.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04001960 * Multiple transmission keys with the same key index may be used when
1961 * VLANs are configured for an access point.
1962 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04001963 * When transmitting, the TX control data will use the @hw_key_idx
1964 * selected by the driver by modifying the &struct ieee80211_key_conf
1965 * pointed to by the @key parameter to the set_key() function.
1966 *
1967 * The set_key() call for the %SET_KEY command should return 0 if
1968 * the key is now in use, -%EOPNOTSUPP or -%ENOSPC if it couldn't be
1969 * added; if you return 0 then hw_key_idx must be assigned to the
1970 * hardware key index, you are free to use the full u8 range.
1971 *
Johannes Bergfa7e1fb2015-01-22 18:44:19 +01001972 * Note that in the case that the @IEEE80211_HW_SW_CRYPTO_CONTROL flag is
1973 * set, mac80211 will not automatically fall back to software crypto if
1974 * enabling hardware crypto failed. The set_key() call may also return the
1975 * value 1 to permit this specific key/algorithm to be done in software.
1976 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04001977 * When the cmd is %DISABLE_KEY then it must succeed.
1978 *
1979 * Note that it is permissible to not decrypt a frame even if a key
1980 * for it has been uploaded to hardware, the stack will not make any
1981 * decision based on whether a key has been uploaded or not but rather
1982 * based on the receive flags.
1983 *
1984 * The &struct ieee80211_key_conf structure pointed to by the @key
1985 * parameter is guaranteed to be valid until another call to set_key()
1986 * removes it, but it can only be used as a cookie to differentiate
1987 * keys.
Emmanuel Grumbach9ae4fda2008-03-20 15:06:42 +02001988 *
1989 * In TKIP some HW need to be provided a phase 1 key, for RX decryption
1990 * acceleration (i.e. iwlwifi). Those drivers should provide update_tkip_key
1991 * handler.
1992 * The update_tkip_key() call updates the driver with the new phase 1 key.
Lucas De Marchi25985ed2011-03-30 22:57:33 -03001993 * This happens every time the iv16 wraps around (every 65536 packets). The
Emmanuel Grumbach9ae4fda2008-03-20 15:06:42 +02001994 * set_key() call will happen only once for each key (unless the AP did
1995 * rekeying), it will not include a valid phase 1 key. The valid phase 1 key is
Bob Copelande37d4df2008-10-20 21:20:27 -04001996 * provided by update_tkip_key only. The trigger that makes mac80211 call this
Emmanuel Grumbach9ae4fda2008-03-20 15:06:42 +02001997 * handler is software decryption with wrap around of iv16.
Yoni Divinskyde5fad82012-05-30 11:36:39 +03001998 *
1999 * The set_default_unicast_key() call updates the default WEP key index
2000 * configured to the hardware for WEP encryption type. This is required
2001 * for devices that support offload of data packets (e.g. ARP responses).
Johannes Berg4150c572007-09-17 01:29:23 -04002002 */
Johannes Berg4150c572007-09-17 01:29:23 -04002003
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002004/**
Johannes Berg4be8c382009-01-07 18:28:20 +01002005 * DOC: Powersave support
2006 *
2007 * mac80211 has support for various powersave implementations.
2008 *
Kalle Valoc99445b2010-01-14 13:09:21 +02002009 * First, it can support hardware that handles all powersaving by itself,
2010 * such hardware should simply set the %IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PS hardware
2011 * flag. In that case, it will be told about the desired powersave mode
2012 * with the %IEEE80211_CONF_PS flag depending on the association status.
2013 * The hardware must take care of sending nullfunc frames when necessary,
2014 * i.e. when entering and leaving powersave mode. The hardware is required
2015 * to look at the AID in beacons and signal to the AP that it woke up when
2016 * it finds traffic directed to it.
Johannes Berg4be8c382009-01-07 18:28:20 +01002017 *
Kalle Valoc99445b2010-01-14 13:09:21 +02002018 * %IEEE80211_CONF_PS flag enabled means that the powersave mode defined in
2019 * IEEE 802.11-2007 section 11.2 is enabled. This is not to be confused
2020 * with hardware wakeup and sleep states. Driver is responsible for waking
Bob Copeland2738bd62010-08-21 16:39:01 -04002021 * up the hardware before issuing commands to the hardware and putting it
2022 * back to sleep at appropriate times.
Kalle Valoc99445b2010-01-14 13:09:21 +02002023 *
2024 * When PS is enabled, hardware needs to wakeup for beacons and receive the
2025 * buffered multicast/broadcast frames after the beacon. Also it must be
2026 * possible to send frames and receive the acknowledment frame.
Johannes Berg4be8c382009-01-07 18:28:20 +01002027 *
2028 * Other hardware designs cannot send nullfunc frames by themselves and also
2029 * need software support for parsing the TIM bitmap. This is also supported
2030 * by mac80211 by combining the %IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PS and
2031 * %IEEE80211_HW_PS_NULLFUNC_STACK flags. The hardware is of course still
Johannes Berg955394c2009-04-16 17:04:25 +02002032 * required to pass up beacons. The hardware is still required to handle
2033 * waking up for multicast traffic; if it cannot the driver must handle that
Kalle Valoc99445b2010-01-14 13:09:21 +02002034 * as best as it can, mac80211 is too slow to do that.
Johannes Berg4be8c382009-01-07 18:28:20 +01002035 *
Kalle Valoc99445b2010-01-14 13:09:21 +02002036 * Dynamic powersave is an extension to normal powersave in which the
2037 * hardware stays awake for a user-specified period of time after sending a
2038 * frame so that reply frames need not be buffered and therefore delayed to
2039 * the next wakeup. It's compromise of getting good enough latency when
2040 * there's data traffic and still saving significantly power in idle
2041 * periods.
2042 *
Bob Copeland2738bd62010-08-21 16:39:01 -04002043 * Dynamic powersave is simply supported by mac80211 enabling and disabling
Kalle Valoc99445b2010-01-14 13:09:21 +02002044 * PS based on traffic. Driver needs to only set %IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PS
2045 * flag and mac80211 will handle everything automatically. Additionally,
2046 * hardware having support for the dynamic PS feature may set the
2047 * %IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_DYNAMIC_PS flag to indicate that it can support
2048 * dynamic PS mode itself. The driver needs to look at the
2049 * @dynamic_ps_timeout hardware configuration value and use it that value
2050 * whenever %IEEE80211_CONF_PS is set. In this case mac80211 will disable
2051 * dynamic PS feature in stack and will just keep %IEEE80211_CONF_PS
2052 * enabled whenever user has enabled powersave.
2053 *
2054 * Driver informs U-APSD client support by enabling
Johannes Berg848955c2014-11-11 12:48:42 +01002055 * %IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_UAPSD flag. The mode is configured through the
Masanari Iidae2278672014-02-18 22:54:36 +09002056 * uapsd parameter in conf_tx() operation. Hardware needs to send the QoS
Kalle Valoc99445b2010-01-14 13:09:21 +02002057 * Nullfunc frames and stay awake until the service period has ended. To
2058 * utilize U-APSD, dynamic powersave is disabled for voip AC and all frames
2059 * from that AC are transmitted with powersave enabled.
2060 *
2061 * Note: U-APSD client mode is not yet supported with
2062 * %IEEE80211_HW_PS_NULLFUNC_STACK.
Johannes Berg4be8c382009-01-07 18:28:20 +01002063 */
2064
2065/**
Kalle Valo04de8382009-03-22 21:57:35 +02002066 * DOC: Beacon filter support
2067 *
2068 * Some hardware have beacon filter support to reduce host cpu wakeups
Justin P. Mattock42b2aa82011-11-28 20:31:00 -08002069 * which will reduce system power consumption. It usually works so that
Kalle Valo04de8382009-03-22 21:57:35 +02002070 * the firmware creates a checksum of the beacon but omits all constantly
2071 * changing elements (TSF, TIM etc). Whenever the checksum changes the
2072 * beacon is forwarded to the host, otherwise it will be just dropped. That
2073 * way the host will only receive beacons where some relevant information
2074 * (for example ERP protection or WMM settings) have changed.
2075 *
Johannes Bergc1288b12012-01-19 09:29:57 +01002076 * Beacon filter support is advertised with the %IEEE80211_VIF_BEACON_FILTER
2077 * interface capability. The driver needs to enable beacon filter support
Johannes Berg955394c2009-04-16 17:04:25 +02002078 * whenever power save is enabled, that is %IEEE80211_CONF_PS is set. When
2079 * power save is enabled, the stack will not check for beacon loss and the
2080 * driver needs to notify about loss of beacons with ieee80211_beacon_loss().
2081 *
2082 * The time (or number of beacons missed) until the firmware notifies the
2083 * driver of a beacon loss event (which in turn causes the driver to call
2084 * ieee80211_beacon_loss()) should be configurable and will be controlled
2085 * by mac80211 and the roaming algorithm in the future.
2086 *
2087 * Since there may be constantly changing information elements that nothing
2088 * in the software stack cares about, we will, in the future, have mac80211
2089 * tell the driver which information elements are interesting in the sense
2090 * that we want to see changes in them. This will include
2091 * - a list of information element IDs
2092 * - a list of OUIs for the vendor information element
2093 *
2094 * Ideally, the hardware would filter out any beacons without changes in the
2095 * requested elements, but if it cannot support that it may, at the expense
2096 * of some efficiency, filter out only a subset. For example, if the device
2097 * doesn't support checking for OUIs it should pass up all changes in all
2098 * vendor information elements.
2099 *
2100 * Note that change, for the sake of simplification, also includes information
2101 * elements appearing or disappearing from the beacon.
2102 *
2103 * Some hardware supports an "ignore list" instead, just make sure nothing
2104 * that was requested is on the ignore list, and include commonly changing
2105 * information element IDs in the ignore list, for example 11 (BSS load) and
2106 * the various vendor-assigned IEs with unknown contents (128, 129, 133-136,
2107 * 149, 150, 155, 156, 173, 176, 178, 179, 219); for forward compatibility
2108 * it could also include some currently unused IDs.
2109 *
2110 *
2111 * In addition to these capabilities, hardware should support notifying the
2112 * host of changes in the beacon RSSI. This is relevant to implement roaming
2113 * when no traffic is flowing (when traffic is flowing we see the RSSI of
2114 * the received data packets). This can consist in notifying the host when
2115 * the RSSI changes significantly or when it drops below or rises above
2116 * configurable thresholds. In the future these thresholds will also be
2117 * configured by mac80211 (which gets them from userspace) to implement
2118 * them as the roaming algorithm requires.
2119 *
2120 * If the hardware cannot implement this, the driver should ask it to
2121 * periodically pass beacon frames to the host so that software can do the
2122 * signal strength threshold checking.
Kalle Valo04de8382009-03-22 21:57:35 +02002123 */
2124
2125/**
Johannes Berg0f782312009-12-01 13:37:02 +01002126 * DOC: Spatial multiplexing power save
2127 *
2128 * SMPS (Spatial multiplexing power save) is a mechanism to conserve
2129 * power in an 802.11n implementation. For details on the mechanism
2130 * and rationale, please refer to 802.11 (as amended by 802.11n-2009)
2131 * "11.2.3 SM power save".
2132 *
2133 * The mac80211 implementation is capable of sending action frames
2134 * to update the AP about the station's SMPS mode, and will instruct
2135 * the driver to enter the specific mode. It will also announce the
2136 * requested SMPS mode during the association handshake. Hardware
2137 * support for this feature is required, and can be indicated by
2138 * hardware flags.
2139 *
2140 * The default mode will be "automatic", which nl80211/cfg80211
2141 * defines to be dynamic SMPS in (regular) powersave, and SMPS
2142 * turned off otherwise.
2143 *
2144 * To support this feature, the driver must set the appropriate
2145 * hardware support flags, and handle the SMPS flag to the config()
2146 * operation. It will then with this mechanism be instructed to
2147 * enter the requested SMPS mode while associated to an HT AP.
2148 */
2149
2150/**
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002151 * DOC: Frame filtering
2152 *
2153 * mac80211 requires to see many management frames for proper
2154 * operation, and users may want to see many more frames when
2155 * in monitor mode. However, for best CPU usage and power consumption,
2156 * having as few frames as possible percolate through the stack is
2157 * desirable. Hence, the hardware should filter as much as possible.
2158 *
2159 * To achieve this, mac80211 uses filter flags (see below) to tell
2160 * the driver's configure_filter() function which frames should be
2161 * passed to mac80211 and which should be filtered out.
2162 *
Johannes Berg3ac64be2009-08-17 16:16:53 +02002163 * Before configure_filter() is invoked, the prepare_multicast()
2164 * callback is invoked with the parameters @mc_count and @mc_list
2165 * for the combined multicast address list of all virtual interfaces.
2166 * It's use is optional, and it returns a u64 that is passed to
2167 * configure_filter(). Additionally, configure_filter() has the
2168 * arguments @changed_flags telling which flags were changed and
2169 * @total_flags with the new flag states.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002170 *
2171 * If your device has no multicast address filters your driver will
2172 * need to check both the %FIF_ALLMULTI flag and the @mc_count
2173 * parameter to see whether multicast frames should be accepted
2174 * or dropped.
2175 *
Michael Bueschd0f5afb2008-02-12 20:12:45 +01002176 * All unsupported flags in @total_flags must be cleared.
2177 * Hardware does not support a flag if it is incapable of _passing_
2178 * the frame to the stack. Otherwise the driver must ignore
2179 * the flag, but not clear it.
2180 * You must _only_ clear the flag (announce no support for the
2181 * flag to mac80211) if you are not able to pass the packet type
2182 * to the stack (so the hardware always filters it).
2183 * So for example, you should clear @FIF_CONTROL, if your hardware
2184 * always filters control frames. If your hardware always passes
2185 * control frames to the kernel and is incapable of filtering them,
2186 * you do _not_ clear the @FIF_CONTROL flag.
2187 * This rule applies to all other FIF flags as well.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002188 */
2189
2190/**
Johannes Berg4b801bc2011-09-29 16:04:40 +02002191 * DOC: AP support for powersaving clients
2192 *
2193 * In order to implement AP and P2P GO modes, mac80211 has support for
2194 * client powersaving, both "legacy" PS (PS-Poll/null data) and uAPSD.
2195 * There currently is no support for sAPSD.
2196 *
2197 * There is one assumption that mac80211 makes, namely that a client
2198 * will not poll with PS-Poll and trigger with uAPSD at the same time.
2199 * Both are supported, and both can be used by the same client, but
2200 * they can't be used concurrently by the same client. This simplifies
2201 * the driver code.
2202 *
2203 * The first thing to keep in mind is that there is a flag for complete
2204 * driver implementation: %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS. If this flag is set,
2205 * mac80211 expects the driver to handle most of the state machine for
2206 * powersaving clients and will ignore the PM bit in incoming frames.
2207 * Drivers then use ieee80211_sta_ps_transition() to inform mac80211 of
2208 * stations' powersave transitions. In this mode, mac80211 also doesn't
2209 * handle PS-Poll/uAPSD.
2210 *
2211 * In the mode without %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS, mac80211 will check the
2212 * PM bit in incoming frames for client powersave transitions. When a
2213 * station goes to sleep, we will stop transmitting to it. There is,
2214 * however, a race condition: a station might go to sleep while there is
2215 * data buffered on hardware queues. If the device has support for this
2216 * it will reject frames, and the driver should give the frames back to
2217 * mac80211 with the %IEEE80211_TX_STAT_TX_FILTERED flag set which will
2218 * cause mac80211 to retry the frame when the station wakes up. The
2219 * driver is also notified of powersave transitions by calling its
2220 * @sta_notify callback.
2221 *
2222 * When the station is asleep, it has three choices: it can wake up,
2223 * it can PS-Poll, or it can possibly start a uAPSD service period.
2224 * Waking up is implemented by simply transmitting all buffered (and
2225 * filtered) frames to the station. This is the easiest case. When
2226 * the station sends a PS-Poll or a uAPSD trigger frame, mac80211
2227 * will inform the driver of this with the @allow_buffered_frames
2228 * callback; this callback is optional. mac80211 will then transmit
Johannes Berg02f2f1a2012-02-27 12:18:30 +01002229 * the frames as usual and set the %IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER
Johannes Berg4b801bc2011-09-29 16:04:40 +02002230 * on each frame. The last frame in the service period (or the only
2231 * response to a PS-Poll) also has %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP set to
2232 * indicate that it ends the service period; as this frame must have
2233 * TX status report it also sets %IEEE80211_TX_CTL_REQ_TX_STATUS.
2234 * When TX status is reported for this frame, the service period is
2235 * marked has having ended and a new one can be started by the peer.
2236 *
Johannes Berg02f2f1a2012-02-27 12:18:30 +01002237 * Additionally, non-bufferable MMPDUs can also be transmitted by
2238 * mac80211 with the %IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER set in them.
2239 *
Johannes Berg4b801bc2011-09-29 16:04:40 +02002240 * Another race condition can happen on some devices like iwlwifi
2241 * when there are frames queued for the station and it wakes up
2242 * or polls; the frames that are already queued could end up being
2243 * transmitted first instead, causing reordering and/or wrong
2244 * processing of the EOSP. The cause is that allowing frames to be
2245 * transmitted to a certain station is out-of-band communication to
2246 * the device. To allow this problem to be solved, the driver can
2247 * call ieee80211_sta_block_awake() if frames are buffered when it
2248 * is notified that the station went to sleep. When all these frames
2249 * have been filtered (see above), it must call the function again
2250 * to indicate that the station is no longer blocked.
2251 *
2252 * If the driver buffers frames in the driver for aggregation in any
2253 * way, it must use the ieee80211_sta_set_buffered() call when it is
2254 * notified of the station going to sleep to inform mac80211 of any
2255 * TIDs that have frames buffered. Note that when a station wakes up
2256 * this information is reset (hence the requirement to call it when
2257 * informed of the station going to sleep). Then, when a service
2258 * period starts for any reason, @release_buffered_frames is called
2259 * with the number of frames to be released and which TIDs they are
2260 * to come from. In this case, the driver is responsible for setting
2261 * the EOSP (for uAPSD) and MORE_DATA bits in the released frames,
Masanari Iidae2278672014-02-18 22:54:36 +09002262 * to help the @more_data parameter is passed to tell the driver if
Johannes Berg4b801bc2011-09-29 16:04:40 +02002263 * there is more data on other TIDs -- the TIDs to release frames
2264 * from are ignored since mac80211 doesn't know how many frames the
2265 * buffers for those TIDs contain.
2266 *
2267 * If the driver also implement GO mode, where absence periods may
2268 * shorten service periods (or abort PS-Poll responses), it must
2269 * filter those response frames except in the case of frames that
2270 * are buffered in the driver -- those must remain buffered to avoid
2271 * reordering. Because it is possible that no frames are released
Johannes Berge9437892013-02-15 21:38:08 +01002272 * in this case, the driver must call ieee80211_sta_eosp()
Johannes Berg4b801bc2011-09-29 16:04:40 +02002273 * to indicate to mac80211 that the service period ended anyway.
2274 *
2275 * Finally, if frames from multiple TIDs are released from mac80211
2276 * but the driver might reorder them, it must clear & set the flags
2277 * appropriately (only the last frame may have %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP)
2278 * and also take care of the EOSP and MORE_DATA bits in the frame.
Johannes Berge9437892013-02-15 21:38:08 +01002279 * The driver may also use ieee80211_sta_eosp() in this case.
Johannes Bergb77cf4f2014-01-09 00:00:38 +01002280 *
2281 * Note that if the driver ever buffers frames other than QoS-data
2282 * frames, it must take care to never send a non-QoS-data frame as
2283 * the last frame in a service period, adding a QoS-nulldata frame
2284 * after a non-QoS-data frame if needed.
Johannes Berg4b801bc2011-09-29 16:04:40 +02002285 */
2286
2287/**
Johannes Berg3a25a8c2012-04-03 16:28:50 +02002288 * DOC: HW queue control
2289 *
2290 * Before HW queue control was introduced, mac80211 only had a single static
2291 * assignment of per-interface AC software queues to hardware queues. This
2292 * was problematic for a few reasons:
2293 * 1) off-channel transmissions might get stuck behind other frames
2294 * 2) multiple virtual interfaces couldn't be handled correctly
2295 * 3) after-DTIM frames could get stuck behind other frames
2296 *
2297 * To solve this, hardware typically uses multiple different queues for all
2298 * the different usages, and this needs to be propagated into mac80211 so it
2299 * won't have the same problem with the software queues.
2300 *
2301 * Therefore, mac80211 now offers the %IEEE80211_HW_QUEUE_CONTROL capability
2302 * flag that tells it that the driver implements its own queue control. To do
2303 * so, the driver will set up the various queues in each &struct ieee80211_vif
2304 * and the offchannel queue in &struct ieee80211_hw. In response, mac80211 will
2305 * use those queue IDs in the hw_queue field of &struct ieee80211_tx_info and
2306 * if necessary will queue the frame on the right software queue that mirrors
2307 * the hardware queue.
2308 * Additionally, the driver has to then use these HW queue IDs for the queue
2309 * management functions (ieee80211_stop_queue() et al.)
2310 *
2311 * The driver is free to set up the queue mappings as needed, multiple virtual
2312 * interfaces may map to the same hardware queues if needed. The setup has to
2313 * happen during add_interface or change_interface callbacks. For example, a
2314 * driver supporting station+station and station+AP modes might decide to have
2315 * 10 hardware queues to handle different scenarios:
2316 *
2317 * 4 AC HW queues for 1st vif: 0, 1, 2, 3
2318 * 4 AC HW queues for 2nd vif: 4, 5, 6, 7
2319 * after-DTIM queue for AP: 8
2320 * off-channel queue: 9
2321 *
2322 * It would then set up the hardware like this:
2323 * hw.offchannel_tx_hw_queue = 9
2324 *
2325 * and the first virtual interface that is added as follows:
2326 * vif.hw_queue[IEEE80211_AC_VO] = 0
2327 * vif.hw_queue[IEEE80211_AC_VI] = 1
2328 * vif.hw_queue[IEEE80211_AC_BE] = 2
2329 * vif.hw_queue[IEEE80211_AC_BK] = 3
2330 * vif.cab_queue = 8 // if AP mode, otherwise %IEEE80211_INVAL_HW_QUEUE
2331 * and the second virtual interface with 4-7.
2332 *
2333 * If queue 6 gets full, for example, mac80211 would only stop the second
2334 * virtual interface's BE queue since virtual interface queues are per AC.
2335 *
2336 * Note that the vif.cab_queue value should be set to %IEEE80211_INVAL_HW_QUEUE
2337 * whenever the queue is not used (i.e. the interface is not in AP mode) if the
2338 * queue could potentially be shared since mac80211 will look at cab_queue when
2339 * a queue is stopped/woken even if the interface is not in AP mode.
2340 */
2341
2342/**
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002343 * enum ieee80211_filter_flags - hardware filter flags
2344 *
2345 * These flags determine what the filter in hardware should be
2346 * programmed to let through and what should not be passed to the
2347 * stack. It is always safe to pass more frames than requested,
2348 * but this has negative impact on power consumption.
2349 *
2350 * @FIF_PROMISC_IN_BSS: promiscuous mode within your BSS,
2351 * think of the BSS as your network segment and then this corresponds
2352 * to the regular ethernet device promiscuous mode.
2353 *
2354 * @FIF_ALLMULTI: pass all multicast frames, this is used if requested
2355 * by the user or if the hardware is not capable of filtering by
2356 * multicast address.
2357 *
2358 * @FIF_FCSFAIL: pass frames with failed FCS (but you need to set the
2359 * %RX_FLAG_FAILED_FCS_CRC for them)
2360 *
2361 * @FIF_PLCPFAIL: pass frames with failed PLCP CRC (but you need to set
2362 * the %RX_FLAG_FAILED_PLCP_CRC for them
2363 *
2364 * @FIF_BCN_PRBRESP_PROMISC: This flag is set during scanning to indicate
2365 * to the hardware that it should not filter beacons or probe responses
2366 * by BSSID. Filtering them can greatly reduce the amount of processing
2367 * mac80211 needs to do and the amount of CPU wakeups, so you should
2368 * honour this flag if possible.
2369 *
Igor Perminove3b90ca2009-08-04 16:48:51 +04002370 * @FIF_CONTROL: pass control frames (except for PS Poll), if PROMISC_IN_BSS
Johannes Berg7be50862010-10-13 12:06:24 +02002371 * is not set then only those addressed to this station.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002372 *
2373 * @FIF_OTHER_BSS: pass frames destined to other BSSes
Igor Perminove3b90ca2009-08-04 16:48:51 +04002374 *
Johannes Berg7be50862010-10-13 12:06:24 +02002375 * @FIF_PSPOLL: pass PS Poll frames, if PROMISC_IN_BSS is not set then only
2376 * those addressed to this station.
2377 *
2378 * @FIF_PROBE_REQ: pass probe request frames
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002379 */
2380enum ieee80211_filter_flags {
2381 FIF_PROMISC_IN_BSS = 1<<0,
2382 FIF_ALLMULTI = 1<<1,
2383 FIF_FCSFAIL = 1<<2,
2384 FIF_PLCPFAIL = 1<<3,
2385 FIF_BCN_PRBRESP_PROMISC = 1<<4,
2386 FIF_CONTROL = 1<<5,
2387 FIF_OTHER_BSS = 1<<6,
Igor Perminove3b90ca2009-08-04 16:48:51 +04002388 FIF_PSPOLL = 1<<7,
Johannes Berg7be50862010-10-13 12:06:24 +02002389 FIF_PROBE_REQ = 1<<8,
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002390};
2391
2392/**
Ron Rindjunsky1b7d03a2007-12-25 17:00:31 +02002393 * enum ieee80211_ampdu_mlme_action - A-MPDU actions
2394 *
2395 * These flags are used with the ampdu_action() callback in
2396 * &struct ieee80211_ops to indicate which action is needed.
Johannes Berg827d42c2009-11-22 12:28:41 +01002397 *
2398 * Note that drivers MUST be able to deal with a TX aggregation
2399 * session being stopped even before they OK'ed starting it by
Johannes Berg5d22c892010-06-10 10:21:40 +02002400 * calling ieee80211_start_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe, because the peer
Johannes Berg827d42c2009-11-22 12:28:41 +01002401 * might receive the addBA frame and send a delBA right away!
2402 *
Johannes Berg18b559d2012-07-18 13:51:25 +02002403 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_START: start RX aggregation
2404 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_STOP: stop RX aggregation
2405 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_START: start TX aggregation
Johannes Bergb1720232009-03-23 17:28:39 +01002406 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_OPERATIONAL: TX aggregation has become operational
Johannes Berg18b559d2012-07-18 13:51:25 +02002407 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_CONT: stop TX aggregation but continue transmitting
2408 * queued packets, now unaggregated. After all packets are transmitted the
2409 * driver has to call ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe().
2410 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_FLUSH: stop TX aggregation and flush all packets,
2411 * called when the station is removed. There's no need or reason to call
2412 * ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe() in this case as mac80211 assumes the
2413 * session is gone and removes the station.
2414 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_FLUSH_CONT: called when TX aggregation is stopped
2415 * but the driver hasn't called ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe() yet and
2416 * now the connection is dropped and the station will be removed. Drivers
2417 * should clean up and drop remaining packets when this is called.
Ron Rindjunsky1b7d03a2007-12-25 17:00:31 +02002418 */
2419enum ieee80211_ampdu_mlme_action {
2420 IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_START,
2421 IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_STOP,
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02002422 IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_START,
Johannes Berg18b559d2012-07-18 13:51:25 +02002423 IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_CONT,
2424 IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_FLUSH,
2425 IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_FLUSH_CONT,
Johannes Bergb1720232009-03-23 17:28:39 +01002426 IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_OPERATIONAL,
Ron Rindjunsky1b7d03a2007-12-25 17:00:31 +02002427};
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002428
2429/**
Johannes Berg4049e092011-09-29 16:04:32 +02002430 * enum ieee80211_frame_release_type - frame release reason
2431 * @IEEE80211_FRAME_RELEASE_PSPOLL: frame released for PS-Poll
Johannes Berg47086fc2011-09-29 16:04:33 +02002432 * @IEEE80211_FRAME_RELEASE_UAPSD: frame(s) released due to
2433 * frame received on trigger-enabled AC
Johannes Berg4049e092011-09-29 16:04:32 +02002434 */
2435enum ieee80211_frame_release_type {
2436 IEEE80211_FRAME_RELEASE_PSPOLL,
Johannes Berg47086fc2011-09-29 16:04:33 +02002437 IEEE80211_FRAME_RELEASE_UAPSD,
Johannes Berg4049e092011-09-29 16:04:32 +02002438};
2439
2440/**
Johannes Berg8f727ef2012-03-30 08:43:32 +02002441 * enum ieee80211_rate_control_changed - flags to indicate what changed
2442 *
2443 * @IEEE80211_RC_BW_CHANGED: The bandwidth that can be used to transmit
Johannes Berge1a0c6b2013-02-07 11:47:44 +01002444 * to this station changed. The actual bandwidth is in the station
2445 * information -- for HT20/40 the IEEE80211_HT_CAP_SUP_WIDTH_20_40
2446 * flag changes, for HT and VHT the bandwidth field changes.
Johannes Berg8f727ef2012-03-30 08:43:32 +02002447 * @IEEE80211_RC_SMPS_CHANGED: The SMPS state of the station changed.
Antonio Quartullie687f612012-08-12 18:24:55 +02002448 * @IEEE80211_RC_SUPP_RATES_CHANGED: The supported rate set of this peer
2449 * changed (in IBSS mode) due to discovering more information about
2450 * the peer.
Johannes Berg0af83d32012-12-27 18:55:36 +01002451 * @IEEE80211_RC_NSS_CHANGED: N_SS (number of spatial streams) was changed
2452 * by the peer
Johannes Berg8f727ef2012-03-30 08:43:32 +02002453 */
2454enum ieee80211_rate_control_changed {
2455 IEEE80211_RC_BW_CHANGED = BIT(0),
2456 IEEE80211_RC_SMPS_CHANGED = BIT(1),
Antonio Quartullie687f612012-08-12 18:24:55 +02002457 IEEE80211_RC_SUPP_RATES_CHANGED = BIT(2),
Johannes Berg0af83d32012-12-27 18:55:36 +01002458 IEEE80211_RC_NSS_CHANGED = BIT(3),
Johannes Berg8f727ef2012-03-30 08:43:32 +02002459};
2460
2461/**
Ilan Peerd339d5c2013-02-12 09:34:13 +02002462 * enum ieee80211_roc_type - remain on channel type
2463 *
2464 * With the support for multi channel contexts and multi channel operations,
2465 * remain on channel operations might be limited/deferred/aborted by other
2466 * flows/operations which have higher priority (and vise versa).
2467 * Specifying the ROC type can be used by devices to prioritize the ROC
2468 * operations compared to other operations/flows.
2469 *
2470 * @IEEE80211_ROC_TYPE_NORMAL: There are no special requirements for this ROC.
2471 * @IEEE80211_ROC_TYPE_MGMT_TX: The remain on channel request is required
2472 * for sending managment frames offchannel.
2473 */
2474enum ieee80211_roc_type {
2475 IEEE80211_ROC_TYPE_NORMAL = 0,
2476 IEEE80211_ROC_TYPE_MGMT_TX,
2477};
2478
2479/**
Eliad Pellercf2c92d2014-11-04 11:43:54 +02002480 * enum ieee80211_reconfig_complete_type - reconfig type
2481 *
2482 * This enum is used by the reconfig_complete() callback to indicate what
2483 * reconfiguration type was completed.
2484 *
2485 * @IEEE80211_RECONFIG_TYPE_RESTART: hw restart type
2486 * (also due to resume() callback returning 1)
2487 * @IEEE80211_RECONFIG_TYPE_SUSPEND: suspend type (regardless
2488 * of wowlan configuration)
2489 */
2490enum ieee80211_reconfig_type {
2491 IEEE80211_RECONFIG_TYPE_RESTART,
2492 IEEE80211_RECONFIG_TYPE_SUSPEND,
2493};
2494
2495/**
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002496 * struct ieee80211_ops - callbacks from mac80211 to the driver
2497 *
2498 * This structure contains various callbacks that the driver may
2499 * handle or, in some cases, must handle, for example to configure
2500 * the hardware to a new channel or to transmit a frame.
2501 *
2502 * @tx: Handler that 802.11 module calls for each transmitted frame.
2503 * skb contains the buffer starting from the IEEE 802.11 header.
2504 * The low-level driver should send the frame out based on
Johannes Bergeefce912008-05-17 00:57:13 +02002505 * configuration in the TX control data. This handler should,
Johannes Berg11127e92011-11-16 16:02:47 +01002506 * preferably, never fail and stop queues appropriately.
Johannes Berg11127e92011-11-16 16:02:47 +01002507 * Must be atomic.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002508 *
2509 * @start: Called before the first netdevice attached to the hardware
2510 * is enabled. This should turn on the hardware and must turn on
2511 * frame reception (for possibly enabled monitor interfaces.)
2512 * Returns negative error codes, these may be seen in userspace,
2513 * or zero.
2514 * When the device is started it should not have a MAC address
2515 * to avoid acknowledging frames before a non-monitor device
2516 * is added.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01002517 * Must be implemented and can sleep.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002518 *
2519 * @stop: Called after last netdevice attached to the hardware
2520 * is disabled. This should turn off the hardware (at least
2521 * it must turn off frame reception.)
2522 * May be called right after add_interface if that rejects
Luis R. Rodriguez42935ec2009-07-29 20:08:07 -04002523 * an interface. If you added any work onto the mac80211 workqueue
2524 * you should ensure to cancel it on this callback.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01002525 * Must be implemented and can sleep.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002526 *
Johannes Bergeecc4802011-05-04 15:37:29 +02002527 * @suspend: Suspend the device; mac80211 itself will quiesce before and
2528 * stop transmitting and doing any other configuration, and then
2529 * ask the device to suspend. This is only invoked when WoWLAN is
2530 * configured, otherwise the device is deconfigured completely and
2531 * reconfigured at resume time.
Johannes Berg2b4562d2011-07-02 00:02:01 +02002532 * The driver may also impose special conditions under which it
2533 * wants to use the "normal" suspend (deconfigure), say if it only
2534 * supports WoWLAN when the device is associated. In this case, it
2535 * must return 1 from this function.
Johannes Bergeecc4802011-05-04 15:37:29 +02002536 *
2537 * @resume: If WoWLAN was configured, this indicates that mac80211 is
2538 * now resuming its operation, after this the device must be fully
2539 * functional again. If this returns an error, the only way out is
2540 * to also unregister the device. If it returns 1, then mac80211
2541 * will also go through the regular complete restart on resume.
2542 *
Johannes Bergd13e1412012-06-09 10:31:09 +02002543 * @set_wakeup: Enable or disable wakeup when WoWLAN configuration is
2544 * modified. The reason is that device_set_wakeup_enable() is
2545 * supposed to be called when the configuration changes, not only
2546 * in suspend().
2547 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002548 * @add_interface: Called when a netdevice attached to the hardware is
Bob Copelande37d4df2008-10-20 21:20:27 -04002549 * enabled. Because it is not called for monitor mode devices, @start
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002550 * and @stop must be implemented.
2551 * The driver should perform any initialization it needs before
2552 * the device can be enabled. The initial configuration for the
2553 * interface is given in the conf parameter.
2554 * The callback may refuse to add an interface by returning a
2555 * negative error code (which will be seen in userspace.)
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01002556 * Must be implemented and can sleep.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002557 *
Johannes Berg34d4bc42010-08-27 12:35:58 +02002558 * @change_interface: Called when a netdevice changes type. This callback
2559 * is optional, but only if it is supported can interface types be
2560 * switched while the interface is UP. The callback may sleep.
2561 * Note that while an interface is being switched, it will not be
2562 * found by the interface iteration callbacks.
2563 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002564 * @remove_interface: Notifies a driver that an interface is going down.
2565 * The @stop callback is called after this if it is the last interface
2566 * and no monitor interfaces are present.
2567 * When all interfaces are removed, the MAC address in the hardware
2568 * must be cleared so the device no longer acknowledges packets,
2569 * the mac_addr member of the conf structure is, however, set to the
2570 * MAC address of the device going away.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01002571 * Hence, this callback must be implemented. It can sleep.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002572 *
2573 * @config: Handler for configuration requests. IEEE 802.11 code calls this
2574 * function to change hardware configuration, e.g., channel.
Bob Copeland6dd1bf32009-01-08 21:00:34 -05002575 * This function should never fail but returns a negative error code
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01002576 * if it does. The callback can sleep.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002577 *
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +01002578 * @bss_info_changed: Handler for configuration requests related to BSS
2579 * parameters that may vary during BSS's lifespan, and may affect low
2580 * level driver (e.g. assoc/disassoc status, erp parameters).
2581 * This function should not be used if no BSS has been set, unless
2582 * for association indication. The @changed parameter indicates which
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01002583 * of the bss parameters has changed when a call is made. The callback
2584 * can sleep.
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +01002585 *
Johannes Berg3ac64be2009-08-17 16:16:53 +02002586 * @prepare_multicast: Prepare for multicast filter configuration.
2587 * This callback is optional, and its return value is passed
2588 * to configure_filter(). This callback must be atomic.
2589 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002590 * @configure_filter: Configure the device's RX filter.
2591 * See the section "Frame filtering" for more information.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01002592 * This callback must be implemented and can sleep.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002593 *
Luis R. Rodriguez546c80c92008-08-14 11:43:20 -07002594 * @set_tim: Set TIM bit. mac80211 calls this function when a TIM bit
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02002595 * must be set or cleared for a given STA. Must be atomic.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002596 *
2597 * @set_key: See the section "Hardware crypto acceleration"
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01002598 * This callback is only called between add_interface and
2599 * remove_interface calls, i.e. while the given virtual interface
Johannes Bergdc822b52008-12-29 12:55:09 +01002600 * is enabled.
Bob Copeland6dd1bf32009-01-08 21:00:34 -05002601 * Returns a negative error code if the key can't be added.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01002602 * The callback can sleep.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002603 *
Emmanuel Grumbach9ae4fda2008-03-20 15:06:42 +02002604 * @update_tkip_key: See the section "Hardware crypto acceleration"
2605 * This callback will be called in the context of Rx. Called for drivers
2606 * which set IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_TKIP_REQ_RX_P1_KEY.
Kalle Valoeb807fb2010-01-24 14:55:12 +02002607 * The callback must be atomic.
Emmanuel Grumbach9ae4fda2008-03-20 15:06:42 +02002608 *
Johannes Bergc68f4b82011-07-05 16:35:41 +02002609 * @set_rekey_data: If the device supports GTK rekeying, for example while the
2610 * host is suspended, it can assign this callback to retrieve the data
2611 * necessary to do GTK rekeying, this is the KEK, KCK and replay counter.
2612 * After rekeying was done it should (for example during resume) notify
2613 * userspace of the new replay counter using ieee80211_gtk_rekey_notify().
2614 *
Yoni Divinskyde5fad82012-05-30 11:36:39 +03002615 * @set_default_unicast_key: Set the default (unicast) key index, useful for
2616 * WEP when the device sends data packets autonomously, e.g. for ARP
2617 * offloading. The index can be 0-3, or -1 for unsetting it.
2618 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002619 * @hw_scan: Ask the hardware to service the scan request, no need to start
Johannes Berg8318d782008-01-24 19:38:38 +01002620 * the scan state machine in stack. The scan must honour the channel
Kalle Valo9050bdd2009-03-22 21:57:21 +02002621 * configuration done by the regulatory agent in the wiphy's
2622 * registered bands. The hardware (or the driver) needs to make sure
Johannes Bergde95a542009-04-01 11:58:36 +02002623 * that power save is disabled.
2624 * The @req ie/ie_len members are rewritten by mac80211 to contain the
2625 * entire IEs after the SSID, so that drivers need not look at these
2626 * at all but just send them after the SSID -- mac80211 includes the
2627 * (extended) supported rates and HT information (where applicable).
2628 * When the scan finishes, ieee80211_scan_completed() must be called;
2629 * note that it also must be called when the scan cannot finish due to
2630 * any error unless this callback returned a negative error code.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01002631 * The callback can sleep.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002632 *
Eliad Pellerb8564392011-06-13 12:47:30 +03002633 * @cancel_hw_scan: Ask the low-level tp cancel the active hw scan.
2634 * The driver should ask the hardware to cancel the scan (if possible),
2635 * but the scan will be completed only after the driver will call
2636 * ieee80211_scan_completed().
2637 * This callback is needed for wowlan, to prevent enqueueing a new
2638 * scan_work after the low-level driver was already suspended.
2639 * The callback can sleep.
2640 *
Luciano Coelho79f460c2011-05-11 17:09:36 +03002641 * @sched_scan_start: Ask the hardware to start scanning repeatedly at
2642 * specific intervals. The driver must call the
2643 * ieee80211_sched_scan_results() function whenever it finds results.
2644 * This process will continue until sched_scan_stop is called.
2645 *
2646 * @sched_scan_stop: Tell the hardware to stop an ongoing scheduled scan.
Johannes Berg37e33082014-02-17 10:48:17 +01002647 * In this case, ieee80211_sched_scan_stopped() must not be called.
Luciano Coelho79f460c2011-05-11 17:09:36 +03002648 *
Michael Buesch80e775b2009-02-20 15:37:03 +01002649 * @sw_scan_start: Notifier function that is called just before a software scan
2650 * is started. Can be NULL, if the driver doesn't need this notification.
Johannes Berga344d672014-06-12 22:24:31 +02002651 * The mac_addr parameter allows supporting NL80211_SCAN_FLAG_RANDOM_ADDR,
2652 * the driver may set the NL80211_FEATURE_SCAN_RANDOM_MAC_ADDR flag if it
2653 * can use this parameter. The callback can sleep.
Michael Buesch80e775b2009-02-20 15:37:03 +01002654 *
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01002655 * @sw_scan_complete: Notifier function that is called just after a
2656 * software scan finished. Can be NULL, if the driver doesn't need
2657 * this notification.
2658 * The callback can sleep.
Michael Buesch80e775b2009-02-20 15:37:03 +01002659 *
Bob Copeland6dd1bf32009-01-08 21:00:34 -05002660 * @get_stats: Return low-level statistics.
2661 * Returns zero if statistics are available.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01002662 * The callback can sleep.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002663 *
Johannes Berg62da92f2007-12-19 02:03:31 +01002664 * @get_tkip_seq: If your device implements TKIP encryption in hardware this
2665 * callback should be provided to read the TKIP transmit IVs (both IV32
2666 * and IV16) for the given key from hardware.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01002667 * The callback must be atomic.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002668 *
Arik Nemtsovf23a4782010-11-08 11:51:06 +02002669 * @set_frag_threshold: Configuration of fragmentation threshold. Assign this
2670 * if the device does fragmentation by itself; if this callback is
2671 * implemented then the stack will not do fragmentation.
2672 * The callback can sleep.
2673 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002674 * @set_rts_threshold: Configuration of RTS threshold (if device needs it)
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01002675 * The callback can sleep.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002676 *
Johannes Berg34e89502010-02-03 13:59:58 +01002677 * @sta_add: Notifies low level driver about addition of an associated station,
2678 * AP, IBSS/WDS/mesh peer etc. This callback can sleep.
2679 *
2680 * @sta_remove: Notifies low level driver about removal of an associated
Johannes Berg6a9d1b92013-12-04 22:39:17 +01002681 * station, AP, IBSS/WDS/mesh peer etc. Note that after the callback
2682 * returns it isn't safe to use the pointer, not even RCU protected;
2683 * no RCU grace period is guaranteed between returning here and freeing
2684 * the station. See @sta_pre_rcu_remove if needed.
2685 * This callback can sleep.
Johannes Berg34e89502010-02-03 13:59:58 +01002686 *
Sujith Manoharan77d2ece2012-11-20 08:46:02 +05302687 * @sta_add_debugfs: Drivers can use this callback to add debugfs files
2688 * when a station is added to mac80211's station list. This callback
2689 * and @sta_remove_debugfs should be within a CONFIG_MAC80211_DEBUGFS
2690 * conditional. This callback can sleep.
2691 *
2692 * @sta_remove_debugfs: Remove the debugfs files which were added using
2693 * @sta_add_debugfs. This callback can sleep.
2694 *
Johannes Berg34e89502010-02-03 13:59:58 +01002695 * @sta_notify: Notifies low level driver about power state transition of an
Arik Nemtsovd057e5a2011-01-31 22:29:13 +02002696 * associated station, AP, IBSS/WDS/mesh peer etc. For a VIF operating
2697 * in AP mode, this callback will not be called when the flag
2698 * %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS is set. Must be atomic.
Christian Lamparter4571d3b2008-11-30 00:48:41 +01002699 *
Johannes Bergf09603a2012-01-20 13:55:21 +01002700 * @sta_state: Notifies low level driver about state transition of a
2701 * station (which can be the AP, a client, IBSS/WDS/mesh peer etc.)
2702 * This callback is mutually exclusive with @sta_add/@sta_remove.
2703 * It must not fail for down transitions but may fail for transitions
Johannes Berg6a9d1b92013-12-04 22:39:17 +01002704 * up the list of states. Also note that after the callback returns it
2705 * isn't safe to use the pointer, not even RCU protected - no RCU grace
2706 * period is guaranteed between returning here and freeing the station.
2707 * See @sta_pre_rcu_remove if needed.
2708 * The callback can sleep.
2709 *
2710 * @sta_pre_rcu_remove: Notify driver about station removal before RCU
2711 * synchronisation. This is useful if a driver needs to have station
2712 * pointers protected using RCU, it can then use this call to clear
2713 * the pointers instead of waiting for an RCU grace period to elapse
2714 * in @sta_state.
Johannes Bergf09603a2012-01-20 13:55:21 +01002715 * The callback can sleep.
2716 *
Johannes Berg8f727ef2012-03-30 08:43:32 +02002717 * @sta_rc_update: Notifies the driver of changes to the bitrates that can be
2718 * used to transmit to the station. The changes are advertised with bits
2719 * from &enum ieee80211_rate_control_changed and the values are reflected
2720 * in the station data. This callback should only be used when the driver
2721 * uses hardware rate control (%IEEE80211_HW_HAS_RATE_CONTROL) since
2722 * otherwise the rate control algorithm is notified directly.
2723 * Must be atomic.
Johannes Bergf815e2b2014-11-19 00:10:42 +01002724 * @sta_rate_tbl_update: Notifies the driver that the rate table changed. This
2725 * is only used if the configured rate control algorithm actually uses
2726 * the new rate table API, and is therefore optional. Must be atomic.
Johannes Berg8f727ef2012-03-30 08:43:32 +02002727 *
Johannes Berg2b9a7e12014-11-17 11:35:23 +01002728 * @sta_statistics: Get statistics for this station. For example with beacon
2729 * filtering, the statistics kept by mac80211 might not be accurate, so
2730 * let the driver pre-fill the statistics. The driver can fill most of
2731 * the values (indicating which by setting the filled bitmap), but not
2732 * all of them make sense - see the source for which ones are possible.
2733 * Statistics that the driver doesn't fill will be filled by mac80211.
2734 * The callback can sleep.
2735 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002736 * @conf_tx: Configure TX queue parameters (EDCF (aifs, cw_min, cw_max),
Johannes Bergfe3fa822008-09-08 11:05:09 +02002737 * bursting) for a hardware TX queue.
Bob Copeland6dd1bf32009-01-08 21:00:34 -05002738 * Returns a negative error code on failure.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01002739 * The callback can sleep.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002740 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002741 * @get_tsf: Get the current TSF timer value from firmware/hardware. Currently,
Alina Friedrichsen3b5d6652009-01-24 07:09:59 +01002742 * this is only used for IBSS mode BSSID merging and debugging. Is not a
Alina Friedrichsen7b08b3b2009-02-05 17:58:34 +01002743 * required function.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01002744 * The callback can sleep.
Alina Friedrichsen3b5d6652009-01-24 07:09:59 +01002745 *
2746 * @set_tsf: Set the TSF timer to the specified value in the firmware/hardware.
Johannes Bergad24b0d2013-07-05 11:53:28 +02002747 * Currently, this is only used for IBSS mode debugging. Is not a
Alina Friedrichsen7b08b3b2009-02-05 17:58:34 +01002748 * required function.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01002749 * The callback can sleep.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002750 *
2751 * @reset_tsf: Reset the TSF timer and allow firmware/hardware to synchronize
2752 * with other STAs in the IBSS. This is only used in IBSS mode. This
2753 * function is optional if the firmware/hardware takes full care of
2754 * TSF synchronization.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01002755 * The callback can sleep.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002756 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002757 * @tx_last_beacon: Determine whether the last IBSS beacon was sent by us.
2758 * This is needed only for IBSS mode and the result of this function is
2759 * used to determine whether to reply to Probe Requests.
Bob Copeland6dd1bf32009-01-08 21:00:34 -05002760 * Returns non-zero if this device sent the last beacon.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01002761 * The callback can sleep.
Ron Rindjunskyd3c990f2007-11-26 16:14:34 +02002762 *
Ron Rindjunsky1b7d03a2007-12-25 17:00:31 +02002763 * @ampdu_action: Perform a certain A-MPDU action
2764 * The RA/TID combination determines the destination and TID we want
2765 * the ampdu action to be performed for. The action is defined through
2766 * ieee80211_ampdu_mlme_action. Starting sequence number (@ssn)
Bob Copeland6dd1bf32009-01-08 21:00:34 -05002767 * is the first frame we expect to perform the action on. Notice
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02002768 * that TX/RX_STOP can pass NULL for this parameter.
Johannes Berg0b01f032011-01-18 13:51:05 +01002769 * The @buf_size parameter is only valid when the action is set to
2770 * %IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_OPERATIONAL and indicates the peer's reorder
Johannes Berg5312c3f2011-04-01 13:52:34 +02002771 * buffer size (number of subframes) for this session -- the driver
2772 * may neither send aggregates containing more subframes than this
2773 * nor send aggregates in a way that lost frames would exceed the
2774 * buffer size. If just limiting the aggregate size, this would be
2775 * possible with a buf_size of 8:
2776 * - TX: 1.....7
2777 * - RX: 2....7 (lost frame #1)
2778 * - TX: 8..1...
2779 * which is invalid since #1 was now re-transmitted well past the
2780 * buffer size of 8. Correct ways to retransmit #1 would be:
2781 * - TX: 1 or 18 or 81
2782 * Even "189" would be wrong since 1 could be lost again.
2783 *
Bob Copeland6dd1bf32009-01-08 21:00:34 -05002784 * Returns a negative error code on failure.
Johannes Berg85ad1812010-06-10 10:21:49 +02002785 * The callback can sleep.
Johannes Berg1f87f7d2009-06-02 13:01:41 +02002786 *
Randy Dunlap4e8998f2010-05-21 11:28:33 -07002787 * @get_survey: Return per-channel survey information
2788 *
Johannes Berg1f87f7d2009-06-02 13:01:41 +02002789 * @rfkill_poll: Poll rfkill hardware state. If you need this, you also
2790 * need to set wiphy->rfkill_poll to %true before registration,
2791 * and need to call wiphy_rfkill_set_hw_state() in the callback.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01002792 * The callback can sleep.
Johannes Bergaff89a92009-07-01 21:26:51 +02002793 *
Lukáš Turek310bc672009-12-21 22:50:48 +01002794 * @set_coverage_class: Set slot time for given coverage class as specified
2795 * in IEEE 802.11-2007 section 17.3.8.6 and modify ACK timeout
Lorenzo Bianconia4bcaf52014-09-04 23:57:41 +02002796 * accordingly; coverage class equals to -1 to enable ACK timeout
2797 * estimation algorithm (dynack). To disable dynack set valid value for
2798 * coverage class. This callback is not required and may sleep.
Lukáš Turek310bc672009-12-21 22:50:48 +01002799 *
David Spinadel52981cd2013-07-31 18:06:22 +03002800 * @testmode_cmd: Implement a cfg80211 test mode command. The passed @vif may
2801 * be %NULL. The callback can sleep.
Wey-Yi Guy71063f02011-05-20 09:05:54 -07002802 * @testmode_dump: Implement a cfg80211 test mode dump. The callback can sleep.
Johannes Berga80f7c02009-12-23 13:15:32 +01002803 *
2804 * @flush: Flush all pending frames from the hardware queue, making sure
Johannes Berg39ecc012013-02-13 12:11:00 +01002805 * that the hardware queues are empty. The @queues parameter is a bitmap
2806 * of queues to flush, which is useful if different virtual interfaces
2807 * use different hardware queues; it may also indicate all queues.
2808 * If the parameter @drop is set to %true, pending frames may be dropped.
Emmanuel Grumbach77be2c52014-03-27 11:30:29 +02002809 * Note that vif can be NULL.
Johannes Berg39ecc012013-02-13 12:11:00 +01002810 * The callback can sleep.
Johannes Berg5ce6e432010-05-11 16:20:57 +02002811 *
2812 * @channel_switch: Drivers that need (or want) to offload the channel
2813 * switch operation for CSAs received from the AP may implement this
2814 * callback. They must then call ieee80211_chswitch_done() to indicate
2815 * completion of the channel switch.
John W. Linville4e6cbfd2010-07-29 16:14:13 -04002816 *
Bruno Randolf79b1c462010-11-24 14:34:41 +09002817 * @set_antenna: Set antenna configuration (tx_ant, rx_ant) on the device.
2818 * Parameters are bitmaps of allowed antennas to use for TX/RX. Drivers may
2819 * reject TX/RX mask combinations they cannot support by returning -EINVAL
2820 * (also see nl80211.h @NL80211_ATTR_WIPHY_ANTENNA_TX).
2821 *
2822 * @get_antenna: Get current antenna configuration from device (tx_ant, rx_ant).
Johannes Berg4976b4e2011-01-04 13:02:32 +01002823 *
2824 * @remain_on_channel: Starts an off-channel period on the given channel, must
2825 * call back to ieee80211_ready_on_channel() when on that channel. Note
2826 * that normal channel traffic is not stopped as this is intended for hw
2827 * offload. Frames to transmit on the off-channel channel are transmitted
2828 * normally except for the %IEEE80211_TX_CTL_TX_OFFCHAN flag. When the
2829 * duration (which will always be non-zero) expires, the driver must call
Johannes Berg196ac1c2012-06-05 14:28:40 +02002830 * ieee80211_remain_on_channel_expired().
Johannes Berg196ac1c2012-06-05 14:28:40 +02002831 * Note that this callback may be called while the device is in IDLE and
2832 * must be accepted in this case.
2833 * This callback may sleep.
Johannes Berg4976b4e2011-01-04 13:02:32 +01002834 * @cancel_remain_on_channel: Requests that an ongoing off-channel period is
2835 * aborted before it expires. This callback may sleep.
John W. Linville38c09152011-03-07 16:19:18 -05002836 *
2837 * @set_ringparam: Set tx and rx ring sizes.
2838 *
2839 * @get_ringparam: Get tx and rx ring current and maximum sizes.
Vivek Natarajane8306f92011-04-06 11:41:10 +05302840 *
2841 * @tx_frames_pending: Check if there is any pending frame in the hardware
2842 * queues before entering power save.
Sujith Manoharanbdbfd6b2011-04-27 16:56:51 +05302843 *
2844 * @set_bitrate_mask: Set a mask of rates to be used for rate control selection
2845 * when transmitting a frame. Currently only legacy rates are handled.
2846 * The callback can sleep.
Meenakshi Venkataraman615f7b92011-07-08 08:46:22 -07002847 * @rssi_callback: Notify driver when the average RSSI goes above/below
2848 * thresholds that were registered previously. The callback can sleep.
Johannes Berg4049e092011-09-29 16:04:32 +02002849 *
2850 * @release_buffered_frames: Release buffered frames according to the given
2851 * parameters. In the case where the driver buffers some frames for
2852 * sleeping stations mac80211 will use this callback to tell the driver
2853 * to release some frames, either for PS-poll or uAPSD.
Masanari Iidae2278672014-02-18 22:54:36 +09002854 * Note that if the @more_data parameter is %false the driver must check
Johannes Berg4049e092011-09-29 16:04:32 +02002855 * if there are more frames on the given TIDs, and if there are more than
2856 * the frames being released then it must still set the more-data bit in
2857 * the frame. If the @more_data parameter is %true, then of course the
2858 * more-data bit must always be set.
2859 * The @tids parameter tells the driver which TIDs to release frames
2860 * from, for PS-poll it will always have only a single bit set.
Johannes Bergdeeaee12011-09-29 16:04:35 +02002861 * In the case this is used for a PS-poll initiated release, the
2862 * @num_frames parameter will always be 1 so code can be shared. In
2863 * this case the driver must also set %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP flag
2864 * on the TX status (and must report TX status) so that the PS-poll
2865 * period is properly ended. This is used to avoid sending multiple
2866 * responses for a retried PS-poll frame.
Johannes Berg4049e092011-09-29 16:04:32 +02002867 * In the case this is used for uAPSD, the @num_frames parameter may be
2868 * bigger than one, but the driver may send fewer frames (it must send
2869 * at least one, however). In this case it is also responsible for
Johannes Berg47086fc2011-09-29 16:04:33 +02002870 * setting the EOSP flag in the QoS header of the frames. Also, when the
2871 * service period ends, the driver must set %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP
Johannes Berg37fbd902011-09-29 16:04:39 +02002872 * on the last frame in the SP. Alternatively, it may call the function
Johannes Berge9437892013-02-15 21:38:08 +01002873 * ieee80211_sta_eosp() to inform mac80211 of the end of the SP.
Johannes Berg4049e092011-09-29 16:04:32 +02002874 * This callback must be atomic.
Johannes Berg40b96402011-09-29 16:04:38 +02002875 * @allow_buffered_frames: Prepare device to allow the given number of frames
2876 * to go out to the given station. The frames will be sent by mac80211
2877 * via the usual TX path after this call. The TX information for frames
Johannes Berg02f2f1a2012-02-27 12:18:30 +01002878 * released will also have the %IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER flag set
Johannes Berg40b96402011-09-29 16:04:38 +02002879 * and the last one will also have %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP set. In case
2880 * frames from multiple TIDs are released and the driver might reorder
2881 * them between the TIDs, it must set the %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP flag
2882 * on the last frame and clear it on all others and also handle the EOSP
Johannes Berg37fbd902011-09-29 16:04:39 +02002883 * bit in the QoS header correctly. Alternatively, it can also call the
Johannes Berge9437892013-02-15 21:38:08 +01002884 * ieee80211_sta_eosp() function.
Johannes Berg40b96402011-09-29 16:04:38 +02002885 * The @tids parameter is a bitmap and tells the driver which TIDs the
2886 * frames will be on; it will at most have two bits set.
2887 * This callback must be atomic.
Ben Greeare3521142012-04-23 12:50:31 -07002888 *
2889 * @get_et_sset_count: Ethtool API to get string-set count.
2890 *
2891 * @get_et_stats: Ethtool API to get a set of u64 stats.
2892 *
2893 * @get_et_strings: Ethtool API to get a set of strings to describe stats
2894 * and perhaps other supported types of ethtool data-sets.
2895 *
Johannes Berga1845fc2012-06-27 13:18:36 +02002896 * @mgd_prepare_tx: Prepare for transmitting a management frame for association
2897 * before associated. In multi-channel scenarios, a virtual interface is
2898 * bound to a channel before it is associated, but as it isn't associated
2899 * yet it need not necessarily be given airtime, in particular since any
2900 * transmission to a P2P GO needs to be synchronized against the GO's
2901 * powersave state. mac80211 will call this function before transmitting a
2902 * management frame prior to having successfully associated to allow the
2903 * driver to give it channel time for the transmission, to get a response
2904 * and to be able to synchronize with the GO.
2905 * The callback will be called before each transmission and upon return
2906 * mac80211 will transmit the frame right away.
2907 * The callback is optional and can (should!) sleep.
Michal Kaziorc3645ea2012-06-26 14:37:17 +02002908 *
Arik Nemtsovee10f2c2014-06-11 17:18:27 +03002909 * @mgd_protect_tdls_discover: Protect a TDLS discovery session. After sending
2910 * a TDLS discovery-request, we expect a reply to arrive on the AP's
2911 * channel. We must stay on the channel (no PSM, scan, etc.), since a TDLS
2912 * setup-response is a direct packet not buffered by the AP.
2913 * mac80211 will call this function just before the transmission of a TDLS
2914 * discovery-request. The recommended period of protection is at least
2915 * 2 * (DTIM period).
2916 * The callback is optional and can sleep.
2917 *
Michal Kaziorc3645ea2012-06-26 14:37:17 +02002918 * @add_chanctx: Notifies device driver about new channel context creation.
2919 * @remove_chanctx: Notifies device driver about channel context destruction.
2920 * @change_chanctx: Notifies device driver about channel context changes that
2921 * may happen when combining different virtual interfaces on the same
2922 * channel context with different settings
2923 * @assign_vif_chanctx: Notifies device driver about channel context being bound
2924 * to vif. Possible use is for hw queue remapping.
2925 * @unassign_vif_chanctx: Notifies device driver about channel context being
2926 * unbound from vif.
Luciano Coelho1a5f0c12014-05-23 14:33:12 +03002927 * @switch_vif_chanctx: switch a number of vifs from one chanctx to
2928 * another, as specified in the list of
2929 * @ieee80211_vif_chanctx_switch passed to the driver, according
2930 * to the mode defined in &ieee80211_chanctx_switch_mode.
2931 *
Johannes Berg10416382012-10-19 15:44:42 +02002932 * @start_ap: Start operation on the AP interface, this is called after all the
2933 * information in bss_conf is set and beacon can be retrieved. A channel
2934 * context is bound before this is called. Note that if the driver uses
2935 * software scan or ROC, this (and @stop_ap) isn't called when the AP is
2936 * just "paused" for scanning/ROC, which is indicated by the beacon being
2937 * disabled/enabled via @bss_info_changed.
2938 * @stop_ap: Stop operation on the AP interface.
Johannes Berg9214ad72012-11-06 19:18:13 +01002939 *
Eliad Pellercf2c92d2014-11-04 11:43:54 +02002940 * @reconfig_complete: Called after a call to ieee80211_restart_hw() and
2941 * during resume, when the reconfiguration has completed.
2942 * This can help the driver implement the reconfiguration step (and
2943 * indicate mac80211 is ready to receive frames).
2944 * This callback may sleep.
Johannes Berg8f21b0a2013-01-11 00:28:01 +01002945 *
Johannes Berga65240c2013-01-14 15:14:34 +01002946 * @ipv6_addr_change: IPv6 address assignment on the given interface changed.
2947 * Currently, this is only called for managed or P2P client interfaces.
2948 * This callback is optional; it must not sleep.
Simon Wunderlich73da7d52013-07-11 16:09:06 +02002949 *
2950 * @channel_switch_beacon: Starts a channel switch to a new channel.
2951 * Beacons are modified to include CSA or ECSA IEs before calling this
2952 * function. The corresponding count fields in these IEs must be
Luciano Coelho66e01cf2014-01-13 19:43:00 +02002953 * decremented, and when they reach 1 the driver must call
Simon Wunderlich73da7d52013-07-11 16:09:06 +02002954 * ieee80211_csa_finish(). Drivers which use ieee80211_beacon_get()
2955 * get the csa counter decremented by mac80211, but must check if it is
Luciano Coelho66e01cf2014-01-13 19:43:00 +02002956 * 1 using ieee80211_csa_is_complete() after the beacon has been
Simon Wunderlich73da7d52013-07-11 16:09:06 +02002957 * transmitted and then call ieee80211_csa_finish().
Luciano Coelho66e01cf2014-01-13 19:43:00 +02002958 * If the CSA count starts as zero or 1, this function will not be called,
2959 * since there won't be any time to beacon before the switch anyway.
Luciano Coelho6d027bc2014-10-08 09:48:37 +03002960 * @pre_channel_switch: This is an optional callback that is called
2961 * before a channel switch procedure is started (ie. when a STA
2962 * gets a CSA or an userspace initiated channel-switch), allowing
2963 * the driver to prepare for the channel switch.
Luciano Coelhof1d65582014-10-08 09:48:38 +03002964 * @post_channel_switch: This is an optional callback that is called
2965 * after a channel switch procedure is completed, allowing the
2966 * driver to go back to a normal configuration.
Simon Wunderlich73da7d52013-07-11 16:09:06 +02002967 *
Johannes Berg55fff502013-08-19 18:48:41 +02002968 * @join_ibss: Join an IBSS (on an IBSS interface); this is called after all
2969 * information in bss_conf is set up and the beacon can be retrieved. A
2970 * channel context is bound before this is called.
2971 * @leave_ibss: Leave the IBSS again.
Antonio Quartullicca674d2014-05-19 21:53:20 +02002972 *
2973 * @get_expected_throughput: extract the expected throughput towards the
2974 * specified station. The returned value is expressed in Kbps. It returns 0
2975 * if the RC algorithm does not have proper data to provide.
Felix Fietkau5b3dc422014-10-26 00:32:53 +02002976 *
2977 * @get_txpower: get current maximum tx power (in dBm) based on configuration
2978 * and hardware limits.
Arik Nemtsova7a6bdd2014-11-09 18:50:19 +02002979 *
2980 * @tdls_channel_switch: Start channel-switching with a TDLS peer. The driver
2981 * is responsible for continually initiating channel-switching operations
2982 * and returning to the base channel for communication with the AP. The
2983 * driver receives a channel-switch request template and the location of
2984 * the switch-timing IE within the template as part of the invocation.
2985 * The template is valid only within the call, and the driver can
2986 * optionally copy the skb for further re-use.
2987 * @tdls_cancel_channel_switch: Stop channel-switching with a TDLS peer. Both
2988 * peers must be on the base channel when the call completes.
Arik Nemtsov8a4d32f2014-11-09 18:50:20 +02002989 * @tdls_recv_channel_switch: a TDLS channel-switch related frame (request or
2990 * response) has been received from a remote peer. The driver gets
2991 * parameters parsed from the incoming frame and may use them to continue
2992 * an ongoing channel-switch operation. In addition, a channel-switch
2993 * response template is provided, together with the location of the
2994 * switch-timing IE within the template. The skb can only be used within
2995 * the function call.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002996 */
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07002997struct ieee80211_ops {
Thomas Huehn36323f82012-07-23 21:33:42 +02002998 void (*tx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
2999 struct ieee80211_tx_control *control,
3000 struct sk_buff *skb);
Johannes Berg4150c572007-09-17 01:29:23 -04003001 int (*start)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
Johannes Berg4150c572007-09-17 01:29:23 -04003002 void (*stop)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
Johannes Bergeecc4802011-05-04 15:37:29 +02003003#ifdef CONFIG_PM
3004 int (*suspend)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct cfg80211_wowlan *wowlan);
3005 int (*resume)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
Johannes Berg6d525632012-04-04 15:05:25 +02003006 void (*set_wakeup)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, bool enabled);
Johannes Bergeecc4802011-05-04 15:37:29 +02003007#endif
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003008 int (*add_interface)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Johannes Berg1ed32e42009-12-23 13:15:45 +01003009 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
Johannes Berg34d4bc42010-08-27 12:35:58 +02003010 int (*change_interface)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3011 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
Johannes Berg2ca27bc2010-09-16 14:58:23 +02003012 enum nl80211_iftype new_type, bool p2p);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003013 void (*remove_interface)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Johannes Berg1ed32e42009-12-23 13:15:45 +01003014 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
Johannes Berge8975582008-10-09 12:18:51 +02003015 int (*config)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 changed);
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +01003016 void (*bss_info_changed)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3017 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3018 struct ieee80211_bss_conf *info,
3019 u32 changed);
Johannes Bergb2abb6e2011-07-19 10:39:53 +02003020
Johannes Berg10416382012-10-19 15:44:42 +02003021 int (*start_ap)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3022 void (*stop_ap)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3023
Johannes Berg3ac64be2009-08-17 16:16:53 +02003024 u64 (*prepare_multicast)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Jiri Pirko22bedad32010-04-01 21:22:57 +00003025 struct netdev_hw_addr_list *mc_list);
Johannes Berg4150c572007-09-17 01:29:23 -04003026 void (*configure_filter)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3027 unsigned int changed_flags,
3028 unsigned int *total_flags,
Johannes Berg3ac64be2009-08-17 16:16:53 +02003029 u64 multicast);
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02003030 int (*set_tim)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3031 bool set);
Johannes Bergea49c352007-09-18 17:29:21 -04003032 int (*set_key)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, enum set_key_cmd cmd,
Johannes Bergdc822b52008-12-29 12:55:09 +01003033 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
Johannes Berg11a843b2007-08-28 17:01:55 -04003034 struct ieee80211_key_conf *key);
Emmanuel Grumbach9ae4fda2008-03-20 15:06:42 +02003035 void (*update_tkip_key)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Johannes Bergb3fbdcf2010-01-21 11:40:47 +01003036 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3037 struct ieee80211_key_conf *conf,
3038 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3039 u32 iv32, u16 *phase1key);
Johannes Bergc68f4b82011-07-05 16:35:41 +02003040 void (*set_rekey_data)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3041 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3042 struct cfg80211_gtk_rekey_data *data);
Yoni Divinskyde5fad82012-05-30 11:36:39 +03003043 void (*set_default_unicast_key)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3044 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, int idx);
Johannes Berga060bbf2010-04-27 11:59:34 +02003045 int (*hw_scan)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
David Spinadelc56ef672014-02-05 15:21:13 +02003046 struct ieee80211_scan_request *req);
Eliad Pellerb8564392011-06-13 12:47:30 +03003047 void (*cancel_hw_scan)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3048 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
Luciano Coelho79f460c2011-05-11 17:09:36 +03003049 int (*sched_scan_start)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3050 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3051 struct cfg80211_sched_scan_request *req,
David Spinadel633e2712014-02-06 16:15:23 +02003052 struct ieee80211_scan_ies *ies);
Johannes Berg37e33082014-02-17 10:48:17 +01003053 int (*sched_scan_stop)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Luciano Coelho79f460c2011-05-11 17:09:36 +03003054 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
Johannes Berga344d672014-06-12 22:24:31 +02003055 void (*sw_scan_start)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3056 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3057 const u8 *mac_addr);
3058 void (*sw_scan_complete)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3059 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003060 int (*get_stats)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3061 struct ieee80211_low_level_stats *stats);
Johannes Berg62da92f2007-12-19 02:03:31 +01003062 void (*get_tkip_seq)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u8 hw_key_idx,
3063 u32 *iv32, u16 *iv16);
Arik Nemtsovf23a4782010-11-08 11:51:06 +02003064 int (*set_frag_threshold)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 value);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003065 int (*set_rts_threshold)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 value);
Johannes Berg34e89502010-02-03 13:59:58 +01003066 int (*sta_add)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3067 struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
3068 int (*sta_remove)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3069 struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
Sujith Manoharan77d2ece2012-11-20 08:46:02 +05303070#ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_DEBUGFS
3071 void (*sta_add_debugfs)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3072 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3073 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3074 struct dentry *dir);
3075 void (*sta_remove_debugfs)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3076 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3077 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3078 struct dentry *dir);
3079#endif
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01003080 void (*sta_notify)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02003081 enum sta_notify_cmd, struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
Johannes Bergf09603a2012-01-20 13:55:21 +01003082 int (*sta_state)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3083 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3084 enum ieee80211_sta_state old_state,
3085 enum ieee80211_sta_state new_state);
Johannes Berg6a9d1b92013-12-04 22:39:17 +01003086 void (*sta_pre_rcu_remove)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3087 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3088 struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
Johannes Berg8f727ef2012-03-30 08:43:32 +02003089 void (*sta_rc_update)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3090 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3091 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3092 u32 changed);
Johannes Bergf815e2b2014-11-19 00:10:42 +01003093 void (*sta_rate_tbl_update)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3094 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3095 struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
Johannes Berg2b9a7e12014-11-17 11:35:23 +01003096 void (*sta_statistics)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3097 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3098 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3099 struct station_info *sinfo);
Eliad Peller8a3a3c82011-10-02 10:15:52 +02003100 int (*conf_tx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Johannes Berga3304b02012-03-28 11:04:24 +02003101 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, u16 ac,
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003102 const struct ieee80211_tx_queue_params *params);
Eliad Peller37a41b42011-09-21 14:06:11 +03003103 u64 (*get_tsf)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3104 void (*set_tsf)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3105 u64 tsf);
3106 void (*reset_tsf)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003107 int (*tx_last_beacon)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
Ron Rindjunsky1b7d03a2007-12-25 17:00:31 +02003108 int (*ampdu_action)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Johannes Bergc951ad32009-11-16 12:00:38 +01003109 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
Ron Rindjunsky1b7d03a2007-12-25 17:00:31 +02003110 enum ieee80211_ampdu_mlme_action action,
Johannes Berg0b01f032011-01-18 13:51:05 +01003111 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u16 tid, u16 *ssn,
3112 u8 buf_size);
Holger Schurig12897232010-04-19 10:23:57 +02003113 int (*get_survey)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, int idx,
3114 struct survey_info *survey);
Johannes Berg1f87f7d2009-06-02 13:01:41 +02003115 void (*rfkill_poll)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
Lorenzo Bianconia4bcaf52014-09-04 23:57:41 +02003116 void (*set_coverage_class)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, s16 coverage_class);
Johannes Bergaff89a92009-07-01 21:26:51 +02003117#ifdef CONFIG_NL80211_TESTMODE
David Spinadel52981cd2013-07-31 18:06:22 +03003118 int (*testmode_cmd)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3119 void *data, int len);
Wey-Yi Guy71063f02011-05-20 09:05:54 -07003120 int (*testmode_dump)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct sk_buff *skb,
3121 struct netlink_callback *cb,
3122 void *data, int len);
Johannes Bergaff89a92009-07-01 21:26:51 +02003123#endif
Emmanuel Grumbach77be2c52014-03-27 11:30:29 +02003124 void (*flush)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3125 u32 queues, bool drop);
Johannes Berg5ce6e432010-05-11 16:20:57 +02003126 void (*channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Luciano Coelho0f791eb42014-10-08 09:48:40 +03003127 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
Johannes Berg5ce6e432010-05-11 16:20:57 +02003128 struct ieee80211_channel_switch *ch_switch);
Bruno Randolf15d96752010-11-10 12:50:56 +09003129 int (*set_antenna)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 tx_ant, u32 rx_ant);
3130 int (*get_antenna)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 *tx_ant, u32 *rx_ant);
Johannes Berg21f83582010-12-18 17:20:47 +01003131
3132 int (*remain_on_channel)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Eliad Peller49884562012-11-19 17:05:09 +02003133 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
Johannes Berg21f83582010-12-18 17:20:47 +01003134 struct ieee80211_channel *chan,
Ilan Peerd339d5c2013-02-12 09:34:13 +02003135 int duration,
3136 enum ieee80211_roc_type type);
Johannes Berg21f83582010-12-18 17:20:47 +01003137 int (*cancel_remain_on_channel)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
John W. Linville38c09152011-03-07 16:19:18 -05003138 int (*set_ringparam)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 tx, u32 rx);
3139 void (*get_ringparam)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3140 u32 *tx, u32 *tx_max, u32 *rx, u32 *rx_max);
Vivek Natarajane8306f92011-04-06 11:41:10 +05303141 bool (*tx_frames_pending)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
Sujith Manoharanbdbfd6b2011-04-27 16:56:51 +05303142 int (*set_bitrate_mask)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3143 const struct cfg80211_bitrate_mask *mask);
Meenakshi Venkataraman615f7b92011-07-08 08:46:22 -07003144 void (*rssi_callback)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Emmanuel Grumbach887da912013-01-20 17:32:41 +02003145 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
Meenakshi Venkataraman615f7b92011-07-08 08:46:22 -07003146 enum ieee80211_rssi_event rssi_event);
Johannes Berg4049e092011-09-29 16:04:32 +02003147
Johannes Berg40b96402011-09-29 16:04:38 +02003148 void (*allow_buffered_frames)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3149 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3150 u16 tids, int num_frames,
3151 enum ieee80211_frame_release_type reason,
3152 bool more_data);
Johannes Berg4049e092011-09-29 16:04:32 +02003153 void (*release_buffered_frames)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3154 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3155 u16 tids, int num_frames,
3156 enum ieee80211_frame_release_type reason,
3157 bool more_data);
Ben Greeare3521142012-04-23 12:50:31 -07003158
3159 int (*get_et_sset_count)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3160 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, int sset);
3161 void (*get_et_stats)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3162 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3163 struct ethtool_stats *stats, u64 *data);
3164 void (*get_et_strings)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3165 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3166 u32 sset, u8 *data);
Johannes Berga1845fc2012-06-27 13:18:36 +02003167
3168 void (*mgd_prepare_tx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3169 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
Michal Kaziorc3645ea2012-06-26 14:37:17 +02003170
Arik Nemtsovee10f2c2014-06-11 17:18:27 +03003171 void (*mgd_protect_tdls_discover)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3172 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3173
Michal Kaziorc3645ea2012-06-26 14:37:17 +02003174 int (*add_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3175 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx);
3176 void (*remove_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3177 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx);
3178 void (*change_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3179 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx,
3180 u32 changed);
3181 int (*assign_vif_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3182 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3183 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx);
3184 void (*unassign_vif_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3185 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3186 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx);
Luciano Coelho1a5f0c12014-05-23 14:33:12 +03003187 int (*switch_vif_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3188 struct ieee80211_vif_chanctx_switch *vifs,
3189 int n_vifs,
3190 enum ieee80211_chanctx_switch_mode mode);
Johannes Berg9214ad72012-11-06 19:18:13 +01003191
Eliad Pellercf2c92d2014-11-04 11:43:54 +02003192 void (*reconfig_complete)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3193 enum ieee80211_reconfig_type reconfig_type);
Johannes Berga65240c2013-01-14 15:14:34 +01003194
3195#if IS_ENABLED(CONFIG_IPV6)
3196 void (*ipv6_addr_change)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3197 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3198 struct inet6_dev *idev);
3199#endif
Simon Wunderlich73da7d52013-07-11 16:09:06 +02003200 void (*channel_switch_beacon)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3201 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3202 struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef);
Luciano Coelho6d027bc2014-10-08 09:48:37 +03003203 int (*pre_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3204 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3205 struct ieee80211_channel_switch *ch_switch);
Johannes Berg55fff502013-08-19 18:48:41 +02003206
Luciano Coelhof1d65582014-10-08 09:48:38 +03003207 int (*post_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3208 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3209
Johannes Berg55fff502013-08-19 18:48:41 +02003210 int (*join_ibss)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3211 void (*leave_ibss)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
Antonio Quartullicca674d2014-05-19 21:53:20 +02003212 u32 (*get_expected_throughput)(struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
Felix Fietkau5b3dc422014-10-26 00:32:53 +02003213 int (*get_txpower)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3214 int *dbm);
Arik Nemtsova7a6bdd2014-11-09 18:50:19 +02003215
3216 int (*tdls_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3217 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3218 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u8 oper_class,
3219 struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef,
Arik Nemtsov8a4d32f2014-11-09 18:50:20 +02003220 struct sk_buff *tmpl_skb, u32 ch_sw_tm_ie);
Arik Nemtsova7a6bdd2014-11-09 18:50:19 +02003221 void (*tdls_cancel_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3222 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3223 struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
Arik Nemtsov8a4d32f2014-11-09 18:50:20 +02003224 void (*tdls_recv_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3225 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3226 struct ieee80211_tdls_ch_sw_params *params);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003227};
3228
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003229/**
Ben Greearad287572014-10-22 12:23:01 -07003230 * ieee80211_alloc_hw_nm - Allocate a new hardware device
3231 *
3232 * This must be called once for each hardware device. The returned pointer
3233 * must be used to refer to this device when calling other functions.
3234 * mac80211 allocates a private data area for the driver pointed to by
3235 * @priv in &struct ieee80211_hw, the size of this area is given as
3236 * @priv_data_len.
3237 *
3238 * @priv_data_len: length of private data
3239 * @ops: callbacks for this device
3240 * @requested_name: Requested name for this device.
3241 * NULL is valid value, and means use the default naming (phy%d)
3242 *
3243 * Return: A pointer to the new hardware device, or %NULL on error.
3244 */
3245struct ieee80211_hw *ieee80211_alloc_hw_nm(size_t priv_data_len,
3246 const struct ieee80211_ops *ops,
3247 const char *requested_name);
3248
3249/**
3250 * ieee80211_alloc_hw - Allocate a new hardware device
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003251 *
3252 * This must be called once for each hardware device. The returned pointer
3253 * must be used to refer to this device when calling other functions.
3254 * mac80211 allocates a private data area for the driver pointed to by
3255 * @priv in &struct ieee80211_hw, the size of this area is given as
3256 * @priv_data_len.
3257 *
3258 * @priv_data_len: length of private data
3259 * @ops: callbacks for this device
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01003260 *
3261 * Return: A pointer to the new hardware device, or %NULL on error.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003262 */
Ben Greearad287572014-10-22 12:23:01 -07003263static inline
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003264struct ieee80211_hw *ieee80211_alloc_hw(size_t priv_data_len,
Ben Greearad287572014-10-22 12:23:01 -07003265 const struct ieee80211_ops *ops)
3266{
3267 return ieee80211_alloc_hw_nm(priv_data_len, ops, NULL);
3268}
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003269
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003270/**
3271 * ieee80211_register_hw - Register hardware device
3272 *
Johannes Bergdbbea672008-02-26 14:34:06 +01003273 * You must call this function before any other functions in
3274 * mac80211. Note that before a hardware can be registered, you
3275 * need to fill the contained wiphy's information.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003276 *
3277 * @hw: the device to register as returned by ieee80211_alloc_hw()
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01003278 *
3279 * Return: 0 on success. An error code otherwise.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003280 */
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003281int ieee80211_register_hw(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
3282
Johannes Berge1e54062010-11-30 08:58:45 +01003283/**
3284 * struct ieee80211_tpt_blink - throughput blink description
3285 * @throughput: throughput in Kbit/sec
3286 * @blink_time: blink time in milliseconds
3287 * (full cycle, ie. one off + one on period)
3288 */
3289struct ieee80211_tpt_blink {
3290 int throughput;
3291 int blink_time;
3292};
3293
Johannes Berg67408c82010-11-30 08:59:23 +01003294/**
3295 * enum ieee80211_tpt_led_trigger_flags - throughput trigger flags
3296 * @IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_RADIO: enable blinking with radio
3297 * @IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_WORK: enable blinking when working
3298 * @IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_CONNECTED: enable blinking when at least one
3299 * interface is connected in some way, including being an AP
3300 */
3301enum ieee80211_tpt_led_trigger_flags {
3302 IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_RADIO = BIT(0),
3303 IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_WORK = BIT(1),
3304 IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_CONNECTED = BIT(2),
3305};
3306
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003307#ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS
Joe Perches10dd9b72013-07-31 17:31:37 -07003308char *__ieee80211_get_tx_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
3309char *__ieee80211_get_rx_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
3310char *__ieee80211_get_assoc_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
3311char *__ieee80211_get_radio_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
3312char *__ieee80211_create_tpt_led_trigger(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3313 unsigned int flags,
3314 const struct ieee80211_tpt_blink *blink_table,
3315 unsigned int blink_table_len);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003316#endif
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003317/**
3318 * ieee80211_get_tx_led_name - get name of TX LED
3319 *
3320 * mac80211 creates a transmit LED trigger for each wireless hardware
3321 * that can be used to drive LEDs if your driver registers a LED device.
3322 * This function returns the name (or %NULL if not configured for LEDs)
3323 * of the trigger so you can automatically link the LED device.
3324 *
3325 * @hw: the hardware to get the LED trigger name for
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01003326 *
3327 * Return: The name of the LED trigger. %NULL if not configured for LEDs.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003328 */
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003329static inline char *ieee80211_get_tx_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw)
3330{
3331#ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS
3332 return __ieee80211_get_tx_led_name(hw);
3333#else
3334 return NULL;
3335#endif
3336}
3337
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003338/**
3339 * ieee80211_get_rx_led_name - get name of RX LED
3340 *
3341 * mac80211 creates a receive LED trigger for each wireless hardware
3342 * that can be used to drive LEDs if your driver registers a LED device.
3343 * This function returns the name (or %NULL if not configured for LEDs)
3344 * of the trigger so you can automatically link the LED device.
3345 *
3346 * @hw: the hardware to get the LED trigger name for
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01003347 *
3348 * Return: The name of the LED trigger. %NULL if not configured for LEDs.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003349 */
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003350static inline char *ieee80211_get_rx_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw)
3351{
3352#ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS
3353 return __ieee80211_get_rx_led_name(hw);
3354#else
3355 return NULL;
3356#endif
3357}
3358
Ivo van Doorncdcb0062008-01-07 19:45:24 +01003359/**
3360 * ieee80211_get_assoc_led_name - get name of association LED
3361 *
3362 * mac80211 creates a association LED trigger for each wireless hardware
3363 * that can be used to drive LEDs if your driver registers a LED device.
3364 * This function returns the name (or %NULL if not configured for LEDs)
3365 * of the trigger so you can automatically link the LED device.
3366 *
3367 * @hw: the hardware to get the LED trigger name for
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01003368 *
3369 * Return: The name of the LED trigger. %NULL if not configured for LEDs.
Ivo van Doorncdcb0062008-01-07 19:45:24 +01003370 */
Michael Buesch47f0c502007-09-27 15:10:44 +02003371static inline char *ieee80211_get_assoc_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw)
3372{
3373#ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS
3374 return __ieee80211_get_assoc_led_name(hw);
3375#else
3376 return NULL;
3377#endif
3378}
3379
Ivo van Doorncdcb0062008-01-07 19:45:24 +01003380/**
3381 * ieee80211_get_radio_led_name - get name of radio LED
3382 *
3383 * mac80211 creates a radio change LED trigger for each wireless hardware
3384 * that can be used to drive LEDs if your driver registers a LED device.
3385 * This function returns the name (or %NULL if not configured for LEDs)
3386 * of the trigger so you can automatically link the LED device.
3387 *
3388 * @hw: the hardware to get the LED trigger name for
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01003389 *
3390 * Return: The name of the LED trigger. %NULL if not configured for LEDs.
Ivo van Doorncdcb0062008-01-07 19:45:24 +01003391 */
3392static inline char *ieee80211_get_radio_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw)
3393{
3394#ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS
3395 return __ieee80211_get_radio_led_name(hw);
3396#else
3397 return NULL;
3398#endif
3399}
Michael Buesch47f0c502007-09-27 15:10:44 +02003400
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003401/**
Johannes Berge1e54062010-11-30 08:58:45 +01003402 * ieee80211_create_tpt_led_trigger - create throughput LED trigger
3403 * @hw: the hardware to create the trigger for
Johannes Berg67408c82010-11-30 08:59:23 +01003404 * @flags: trigger flags, see &enum ieee80211_tpt_led_trigger_flags
Johannes Berge1e54062010-11-30 08:58:45 +01003405 * @blink_table: the blink table -- needs to be ordered by throughput
3406 * @blink_table_len: size of the blink table
3407 *
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01003408 * Return: %NULL (in case of error, or if no LED triggers are
3409 * configured) or the name of the new trigger.
3410 *
3411 * Note: This function must be called before ieee80211_register_hw().
Johannes Berge1e54062010-11-30 08:58:45 +01003412 */
3413static inline char *
Johannes Berg67408c82010-11-30 08:59:23 +01003414ieee80211_create_tpt_led_trigger(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, unsigned int flags,
Johannes Berge1e54062010-11-30 08:58:45 +01003415 const struct ieee80211_tpt_blink *blink_table,
3416 unsigned int blink_table_len)
3417{
3418#ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS
Johannes Berg67408c82010-11-30 08:59:23 +01003419 return __ieee80211_create_tpt_led_trigger(hw, flags, blink_table,
Johannes Berge1e54062010-11-30 08:58:45 +01003420 blink_table_len);
3421#else
3422 return NULL;
3423#endif
3424}
3425
3426/**
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003427 * ieee80211_unregister_hw - Unregister a hardware device
3428 *
3429 * This function instructs mac80211 to free allocated resources
3430 * and unregister netdevices from the networking subsystem.
3431 *
3432 * @hw: the hardware to unregister
3433 */
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003434void ieee80211_unregister_hw(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
3435
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003436/**
3437 * ieee80211_free_hw - free hardware descriptor
3438 *
3439 * This function frees everything that was allocated, including the
3440 * private data for the driver. You must call ieee80211_unregister_hw()
Randy Dunlap6ef307b2008-07-03 13:52:18 -07003441 * before calling this function.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003442 *
3443 * @hw: the hardware to free
3444 */
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003445void ieee80211_free_hw(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
3446
Johannes Bergf2753dd2009-04-14 10:09:24 +02003447/**
3448 * ieee80211_restart_hw - restart hardware completely
3449 *
3450 * Call this function when the hardware was restarted for some reason
3451 * (hardware error, ...) and the driver is unable to restore its state
3452 * by itself. mac80211 assumes that at this point the driver/hardware
3453 * is completely uninitialised and stopped, it starts the process by
3454 * calling the ->start() operation. The driver will need to reset all
3455 * internal state that it has prior to calling this function.
3456 *
3457 * @hw: the hardware to restart
3458 */
3459void ieee80211_restart_hw(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
3460
Johannes Berg06d181a2014-02-04 20:51:09 +01003461/**
3462 * ieee80211_napi_add - initialize mac80211 NAPI context
3463 * @hw: the hardware to initialize the NAPI context on
3464 * @napi: the NAPI context to initialize
3465 * @napi_dev: dummy NAPI netdevice, here to not waste the space if the
3466 * driver doesn't use NAPI
3467 * @poll: poll function
3468 * @weight: default weight
John W. Linville4e6cbfd2010-07-29 16:14:13 -04003469 *
Johannes Berg06d181a2014-02-04 20:51:09 +01003470 * See also netif_napi_add().
John W. Linville4e6cbfd2010-07-29 16:14:13 -04003471 */
Johannes Berg06d181a2014-02-04 20:51:09 +01003472void ieee80211_napi_add(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct napi_struct *napi,
3473 struct net_device *napi_dev,
3474 int (*poll)(struct napi_struct *, int),
3475 int weight);
John W. Linville4e6cbfd2010-07-29 16:14:13 -04003476
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003477/**
3478 * ieee80211_rx - receive frame
3479 *
3480 * Use this function to hand received frames to mac80211. The receive
Zhu Yie3cf8b32010-03-29 17:35:07 +08003481 * buffer in @skb must start with an IEEE 802.11 header. In case of a
3482 * paged @skb is used, the driver is recommended to put the ieee80211
3483 * header of the frame on the linear part of the @skb to avoid memory
3484 * allocation and/or memcpy by the stack.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003485 *
Johannes Berg2485f712008-02-25 16:27:41 +01003486 * This function may not be called in IRQ context. Calls to this function
Kalle Valoe36e49f2009-10-13 20:33:13 +03003487 * for a single hardware must be synchronized against each other. Calls to
3488 * this function, ieee80211_rx_ni() and ieee80211_rx_irqsafe() may not be
Felix Fietkauf6b3d852013-05-03 10:01:03 +02003489 * mixed for a single hardware. Must not run concurrently with
3490 * ieee80211_tx_status() or ieee80211_tx_status_ni().
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003491 *
Kalle Valoe36e49f2009-10-13 20:33:13 +03003492 * In process context use instead ieee80211_rx_ni().
Johannes Bergd20ef632009-10-11 15:10:40 +02003493 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003494 * @hw: the hardware this frame came in on
3495 * @skb: the buffer to receive, owned by mac80211 after this call
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003496 */
John W. Linville103bf9f2009-08-20 16:34:15 -04003497void ieee80211_rx(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct sk_buff *skb);
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003498
3499/**
3500 * ieee80211_rx_irqsafe - receive frame
3501 *
3502 * Like ieee80211_rx() but can be called in IRQ context
Johannes Berg2485f712008-02-25 16:27:41 +01003503 * (internally defers to a tasklet.)
3504 *
Kalle Valoe36e49f2009-10-13 20:33:13 +03003505 * Calls to this function, ieee80211_rx() or ieee80211_rx_ni() may not
Felix Fietkauf6b3d852013-05-03 10:01:03 +02003506 * be mixed for a single hardware.Must not run concurrently with
3507 * ieee80211_tx_status() or ieee80211_tx_status_ni().
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003508 *
3509 * @hw: the hardware this frame came in on
3510 * @skb: the buffer to receive, owned by mac80211 after this call
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003511 */
Johannes Bergf1d58c22009-06-17 13:13:00 +02003512void ieee80211_rx_irqsafe(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct sk_buff *skb);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003513
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003514/**
Kalle Valoe36e49f2009-10-13 20:33:13 +03003515 * ieee80211_rx_ni - receive frame (in process context)
3516 *
3517 * Like ieee80211_rx() but can be called in process context
3518 * (internally disables bottom halves).
3519 *
3520 * Calls to this function, ieee80211_rx() and ieee80211_rx_irqsafe() may
Felix Fietkauf6b3d852013-05-03 10:01:03 +02003521 * not be mixed for a single hardware. Must not run concurrently with
3522 * ieee80211_tx_status() or ieee80211_tx_status_ni().
Kalle Valoe36e49f2009-10-13 20:33:13 +03003523 *
3524 * @hw: the hardware this frame came in on
3525 * @skb: the buffer to receive, owned by mac80211 after this call
3526 */
3527static inline void ieee80211_rx_ni(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3528 struct sk_buff *skb)
3529{
3530 local_bh_disable();
3531 ieee80211_rx(hw, skb);
3532 local_bh_enable();
3533}
3534
Arik Nemtsovd057e5a2011-01-31 22:29:13 +02003535/**
3536 * ieee80211_sta_ps_transition - PS transition for connected sta
3537 *
3538 * When operating in AP mode with the %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS
3539 * flag set, use this function to inform mac80211 about a connected station
3540 * entering/leaving PS mode.
3541 *
3542 * This function may not be called in IRQ context or with softirqs enabled.
3543 *
3544 * Calls to this function for a single hardware must be synchronized against
3545 * each other.
3546 *
Arik Nemtsovd057e5a2011-01-31 22:29:13 +02003547 * @sta: currently connected sta
3548 * @start: start or stop PS
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01003549 *
3550 * Return: 0 on success. -EINVAL when the requested PS mode is already set.
Arik Nemtsovd057e5a2011-01-31 22:29:13 +02003551 */
3552int ieee80211_sta_ps_transition(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, bool start);
3553
3554/**
3555 * ieee80211_sta_ps_transition_ni - PS transition for connected sta
3556 * (in process context)
3557 *
3558 * Like ieee80211_sta_ps_transition() but can be called in process context
3559 * (internally disables bottom halves). Concurrent call restriction still
3560 * applies.
3561 *
3562 * @sta: currently connected sta
3563 * @start: start or stop PS
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01003564 *
3565 * Return: Like ieee80211_sta_ps_transition().
Arik Nemtsovd057e5a2011-01-31 22:29:13 +02003566 */
3567static inline int ieee80211_sta_ps_transition_ni(struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3568 bool start)
3569{
3570 int ret;
3571
3572 local_bh_disable();
3573 ret = ieee80211_sta_ps_transition(sta, start);
3574 local_bh_enable();
3575
3576 return ret;
3577}
3578
Gertjan van Wingerded24deb22009-12-04 23:46:54 +01003579/*
3580 * The TX headroom reserved by mac80211 for its own tx_status functions.
3581 * This is enough for the radiotap header.
3582 */
Helmut Schaa7f2a5e22011-10-11 18:08:55 +02003583#define IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_HEADROOM 14
Gertjan van Wingerded24deb22009-12-04 23:46:54 +01003584
Kalle Valoe36e49f2009-10-13 20:33:13 +03003585/**
Johannes Berg042ec452011-09-29 16:04:26 +02003586 * ieee80211_sta_set_buffered - inform mac80211 about driver-buffered frames
Randy Dunlapbdfbe802011-05-22 17:22:45 -07003587 * @sta: &struct ieee80211_sta pointer for the sleeping station
Johannes Berg042ec452011-09-29 16:04:26 +02003588 * @tid: the TID that has buffered frames
3589 * @buffered: indicates whether or not frames are buffered for this TID
Felix Fietkaudcf55fb2011-04-17 17:45:00 +02003590 *
3591 * If a driver buffers frames for a powersave station instead of passing
Johannes Berg042ec452011-09-29 16:04:26 +02003592 * them back to mac80211 for retransmission, the station may still need
3593 * to be told that there are buffered frames via the TIM bit.
Felix Fietkaudcf55fb2011-04-17 17:45:00 +02003594 *
Johannes Berg042ec452011-09-29 16:04:26 +02003595 * This function informs mac80211 whether or not there are frames that are
3596 * buffered in the driver for a given TID; mac80211 can then use this data
3597 * to set the TIM bit (NOTE: This may call back into the driver's set_tim
3598 * call! Beware of the locking!)
3599 *
3600 * If all frames are released to the station (due to PS-poll or uAPSD)
3601 * then the driver needs to inform mac80211 that there no longer are
3602 * frames buffered. However, when the station wakes up mac80211 assumes
3603 * that all buffered frames will be transmitted and clears this data,
3604 * drivers need to make sure they inform mac80211 about all buffered
3605 * frames on the sleep transition (sta_notify() with %STA_NOTIFY_SLEEP).
3606 *
3607 * Note that technically mac80211 only needs to know this per AC, not per
3608 * TID, but since driver buffering will inevitably happen per TID (since
3609 * it is related to aggregation) it is easier to make mac80211 map the
3610 * TID to the AC as required instead of keeping track in all drivers that
3611 * use this API.
Felix Fietkaudcf55fb2011-04-17 17:45:00 +02003612 */
Johannes Berg042ec452011-09-29 16:04:26 +02003613void ieee80211_sta_set_buffered(struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3614 u8 tid, bool buffered);
Felix Fietkaudcf55fb2011-04-17 17:45:00 +02003615
3616/**
Felix Fietkau0d528d82013-04-22 16:14:41 +02003617 * ieee80211_get_tx_rates - get the selected transmit rates for a packet
3618 *
3619 * Call this function in a driver with per-packet rate selection support
3620 * to combine the rate info in the packet tx info with the most recent
3621 * rate selection table for the station entry.
3622 *
3623 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
3624 * @sta: the receiver station to which this packet is sent.
3625 * @skb: the frame to be transmitted.
3626 * @dest: buffer for extracted rate/retry information
3627 * @max_rates: maximum number of rates to fetch
3628 */
3629void ieee80211_get_tx_rates(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3630 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3631 struct sk_buff *skb,
3632 struct ieee80211_tx_rate *dest,
3633 int max_rates);
3634
3635/**
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003636 * ieee80211_tx_status - transmit status callback
3637 *
3638 * Call this function for all transmitted frames after they have been
3639 * transmitted. It is permissible to not call this function for
3640 * multicast frames but this can affect statistics.
3641 *
Johannes Berg2485f712008-02-25 16:27:41 +01003642 * This function may not be called in IRQ context. Calls to this function
3643 * for a single hardware must be synchronized against each other. Calls
Johannes Stezenbach20ed3162010-11-30 16:49:23 +01003644 * to this function, ieee80211_tx_status_ni() and ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe()
Felix Fietkauf6b3d852013-05-03 10:01:03 +02003645 * may not be mixed for a single hardware. Must not run concurrently with
3646 * ieee80211_rx() or ieee80211_rx_ni().
Johannes Berg2485f712008-02-25 16:27:41 +01003647 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003648 * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by
3649 * @skb: the frame that was transmitted, owned by mac80211 after this call
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003650 */
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003651void ieee80211_tx_status(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02003652 struct sk_buff *skb);
Johannes Berg2485f712008-02-25 16:27:41 +01003653
3654/**
Felix Fietkauf027c2a2014-11-19 20:08:13 +01003655 * ieee80211_tx_status_noskb - transmit status callback without skb
3656 *
3657 * This function can be used as a replacement for ieee80211_tx_status
3658 * in drivers that cannot reliably map tx status information back to
3659 * specific skbs.
3660 *
3661 * Calls to this function for a single hardware must be synchronized
3662 * against each other. Calls to this function, ieee80211_tx_status_ni()
3663 * and ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe() may not be mixed for a single hardware.
3664 *
3665 * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by
3666 * @sta: the receiver station to which this packet is sent
3667 * (NULL for multicast packets)
3668 * @info: tx status information
3669 */
3670void ieee80211_tx_status_noskb(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3671 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3672 struct ieee80211_tx_info *info);
3673
3674/**
Johannes Stezenbach20ed3162010-11-30 16:49:23 +01003675 * ieee80211_tx_status_ni - transmit status callback (in process context)
3676 *
3677 * Like ieee80211_tx_status() but can be called in process context.
3678 *
3679 * Calls to this function, ieee80211_tx_status() and
3680 * ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe() may not be mixed
3681 * for a single hardware.
3682 *
3683 * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by
3684 * @skb: the frame that was transmitted, owned by mac80211 after this call
3685 */
3686static inline void ieee80211_tx_status_ni(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3687 struct sk_buff *skb)
3688{
3689 local_bh_disable();
3690 ieee80211_tx_status(hw, skb);
3691 local_bh_enable();
3692}
3693
3694/**
Randy Dunlap6ef307b2008-07-03 13:52:18 -07003695 * ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe - IRQ-safe transmit status callback
Johannes Berg2485f712008-02-25 16:27:41 +01003696 *
3697 * Like ieee80211_tx_status() but can be called in IRQ context
3698 * (internally defers to a tasklet.)
3699 *
Johannes Stezenbach20ed3162010-11-30 16:49:23 +01003700 * Calls to this function, ieee80211_tx_status() and
3701 * ieee80211_tx_status_ni() may not be mixed for a single hardware.
Johannes Berg2485f712008-02-25 16:27:41 +01003702 *
3703 * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by
3704 * @skb: the frame that was transmitted, owned by mac80211 after this call
Johannes Berg2485f712008-02-25 16:27:41 +01003705 */
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003706void ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02003707 struct sk_buff *skb);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003708
3709/**
Arik Nemtsov8178d382011-04-18 14:22:28 +03003710 * ieee80211_report_low_ack - report non-responding station
3711 *
3712 * When operating in AP-mode, call this function to report a non-responding
3713 * connected STA.
3714 *
3715 * @sta: the non-responding connected sta
3716 * @num_packets: number of packets sent to @sta without a response
3717 */
3718void ieee80211_report_low_ack(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u32 num_packets);
3719
Andrei Otcheretianski1af586c2014-05-09 14:11:50 +03003720#define IEEE80211_MAX_CSA_COUNTERS_NUM 2
3721
Arik Nemtsov8178d382011-04-18 14:22:28 +03003722/**
Andrei Otcheretianski6ec8c332014-05-09 14:11:49 +03003723 * struct ieee80211_mutable_offsets - mutable beacon offsets
3724 * @tim_offset: position of TIM element
3725 * @tim_length: size of TIM element
Luciano Coelho8d77ec82014-05-15 20:32:08 +03003726 * @csa_counter_offs: array of IEEE80211_MAX_CSA_COUNTERS_NUM offsets
3727 * to CSA counters. This array can contain zero values which
3728 * should be ignored.
Andrei Otcheretianski6ec8c332014-05-09 14:11:49 +03003729 */
3730struct ieee80211_mutable_offsets {
3731 u16 tim_offset;
3732 u16 tim_length;
Andrei Otcheretianski1af586c2014-05-09 14:11:50 +03003733
3734 u16 csa_counter_offs[IEEE80211_MAX_CSA_COUNTERS_NUM];
Andrei Otcheretianski6ec8c332014-05-09 14:11:49 +03003735};
3736
3737/**
3738 * ieee80211_beacon_get_template - beacon template generation function
3739 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
3740 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
3741 * @offs: &struct ieee80211_mutable_offsets pointer to struct that will
3742 * receive the offsets that may be updated by the driver.
3743 *
3744 * If the driver implements beaconing modes, it must use this function to
3745 * obtain the beacon template.
3746 *
3747 * This function should be used if the beacon frames are generated by the
3748 * device, and then the driver must use the returned beacon as the template
Andrei Otcheretianski1af586c2014-05-09 14:11:50 +03003749 * The driver or the device are responsible to update the DTIM and, when
3750 * applicable, the CSA count.
Andrei Otcheretianski6ec8c332014-05-09 14:11:49 +03003751 *
3752 * The driver is responsible for freeing the returned skb.
3753 *
3754 * Return: The beacon template. %NULL on error.
3755 */
3756struct sk_buff *
3757ieee80211_beacon_get_template(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3758 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3759 struct ieee80211_mutable_offsets *offs);
3760
3761/**
Johannes Bergeddcbb92009-10-29 08:30:35 +01003762 * ieee80211_beacon_get_tim - beacon generation function
3763 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
Johannes Berg1ed32e42009-12-23 13:15:45 +01003764 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
Johannes Bergeddcbb92009-10-29 08:30:35 +01003765 * @tim_offset: pointer to variable that will receive the TIM IE offset.
3766 * Set to 0 if invalid (in non-AP modes).
3767 * @tim_length: pointer to variable that will receive the TIM IE length,
3768 * (including the ID and length bytes!).
3769 * Set to 0 if invalid (in non-AP modes).
3770 *
3771 * If the driver implements beaconing modes, it must use this function to
Andrei Otcheretianski6ec8c332014-05-09 14:11:49 +03003772 * obtain the beacon frame.
Johannes Bergeddcbb92009-10-29 08:30:35 +01003773 *
3774 * If the beacon frames are generated by the host system (i.e., not in
3775 * hardware/firmware), the driver uses this function to get each beacon
Andrei Otcheretianski6ec8c332014-05-09 14:11:49 +03003776 * frame from mac80211 -- it is responsible for calling this function exactly
3777 * once before the beacon is needed (e.g. based on hardware interrupt).
Johannes Bergeddcbb92009-10-29 08:30:35 +01003778 *
3779 * The driver is responsible for freeing the returned skb.
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01003780 *
3781 * Return: The beacon template. %NULL on error.
Johannes Bergeddcbb92009-10-29 08:30:35 +01003782 */
3783struct sk_buff *ieee80211_beacon_get_tim(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3784 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3785 u16 *tim_offset, u16 *tim_length);
3786
3787/**
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003788 * ieee80211_beacon_get - beacon generation function
3789 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
Johannes Berg1ed32e42009-12-23 13:15:45 +01003790 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003791 *
Johannes Bergeddcbb92009-10-29 08:30:35 +01003792 * See ieee80211_beacon_get_tim().
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01003793 *
3794 * Return: See ieee80211_beacon_get_tim().
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003795 */
Johannes Bergeddcbb92009-10-29 08:30:35 +01003796static inline struct sk_buff *ieee80211_beacon_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3797 struct ieee80211_vif *vif)
3798{
3799 return ieee80211_beacon_get_tim(hw, vif, NULL, NULL);
3800}
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003801
3802/**
Andrei Otcheretianski1af586c2014-05-09 14:11:50 +03003803 * ieee80211_csa_update_counter - request mac80211 to decrement the csa counter
3804 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
3805 *
3806 * The csa counter should be updated after each beacon transmission.
3807 * This function is called implicitly when
3808 * ieee80211_beacon_get/ieee80211_beacon_get_tim are called, however if the
3809 * beacon frames are generated by the device, the driver should call this
3810 * function after each beacon transmission to sync mac80211's csa counters.
3811 *
3812 * Return: new csa counter value
3813 */
3814u8 ieee80211_csa_update_counter(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3815
3816/**
Simon Wunderlich73da7d52013-07-11 16:09:06 +02003817 * ieee80211_csa_finish - notify mac80211 about channel switch
3818 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
3819 *
3820 * After a channel switch announcement was scheduled and the counter in this
Luciano Coelho66e01cf2014-01-13 19:43:00 +02003821 * announcement hits 1, this function must be called by the driver to
Simon Wunderlich73da7d52013-07-11 16:09:06 +02003822 * notify mac80211 that the channel can be changed.
3823 */
3824void ieee80211_csa_finish(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3825
3826/**
Luciano Coelho66e01cf2014-01-13 19:43:00 +02003827 * ieee80211_csa_is_complete - find out if counters reached 1
Simon Wunderlich73da7d52013-07-11 16:09:06 +02003828 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
3829 *
3830 * This function returns whether the channel switch counters reached zero.
3831 */
3832bool ieee80211_csa_is_complete(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3833
3834
3835/**
Arik Nemtsov02945822011-11-10 11:28:57 +02003836 * ieee80211_proberesp_get - retrieve a Probe Response template
3837 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
3838 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
3839 *
3840 * Creates a Probe Response template which can, for example, be uploaded to
3841 * hardware. The destination address should be set by the caller.
3842 *
3843 * Can only be called in AP mode.
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01003844 *
3845 * Return: The Probe Response template. %NULL on error.
Arik Nemtsov02945822011-11-10 11:28:57 +02003846 */
3847struct sk_buff *ieee80211_proberesp_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3848 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3849
3850/**
Kalle Valo7044cc52010-01-05 20:16:19 +02003851 * ieee80211_pspoll_get - retrieve a PS Poll template
3852 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
3853 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
3854 *
3855 * Creates a PS Poll a template which can, for example, uploaded to
3856 * hardware. The template must be updated after association so that correct
3857 * AID, BSSID and MAC address is used.
3858 *
3859 * Note: Caller (or hardware) is responsible for setting the
3860 * &IEEE80211_FCTL_PM bit.
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01003861 *
3862 * Return: The PS Poll template. %NULL on error.
Kalle Valo7044cc52010-01-05 20:16:19 +02003863 */
3864struct sk_buff *ieee80211_pspoll_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3865 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3866
3867/**
3868 * ieee80211_nullfunc_get - retrieve a nullfunc template
3869 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
3870 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
3871 *
3872 * Creates a Nullfunc template which can, for example, uploaded to
3873 * hardware. The template must be updated after association so that correct
3874 * BSSID and address is used.
3875 *
3876 * Note: Caller (or hardware) is responsible for setting the
3877 * &IEEE80211_FCTL_PM bit as well as Duration and Sequence Control fields.
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01003878 *
3879 * Return: The nullfunc template. %NULL on error.
Kalle Valo7044cc52010-01-05 20:16:19 +02003880 */
3881struct sk_buff *ieee80211_nullfunc_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3882 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3883
3884/**
Kalle Valo05e54ea2010-01-05 20:16:38 +02003885 * ieee80211_probereq_get - retrieve a Probe Request template
3886 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
Johannes Berga344d672014-06-12 22:24:31 +02003887 * @src_addr: source MAC address
Kalle Valo05e54ea2010-01-05 20:16:38 +02003888 * @ssid: SSID buffer
3889 * @ssid_len: length of SSID
Johannes Bergb9a9ada2012-11-29 13:00:10 +01003890 * @tailroom: tailroom to reserve at end of SKB for IEs
Kalle Valo05e54ea2010-01-05 20:16:38 +02003891 *
3892 * Creates a Probe Request template which can, for example, be uploaded to
3893 * hardware.
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01003894 *
3895 * Return: The Probe Request template. %NULL on error.
Kalle Valo05e54ea2010-01-05 20:16:38 +02003896 */
3897struct sk_buff *ieee80211_probereq_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Johannes Berga344d672014-06-12 22:24:31 +02003898 const u8 *src_addr,
Kalle Valo05e54ea2010-01-05 20:16:38 +02003899 const u8 *ssid, size_t ssid_len,
Johannes Bergb9a9ada2012-11-29 13:00:10 +01003900 size_t tailroom);
Kalle Valo05e54ea2010-01-05 20:16:38 +02003901
3902/**
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003903 * ieee80211_rts_get - RTS frame generation function
3904 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
Johannes Berg1ed32e42009-12-23 13:15:45 +01003905 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003906 * @frame: pointer to the frame that is going to be protected by the RTS.
3907 * @frame_len: the frame length (in octets).
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02003908 * @frame_txctl: &struct ieee80211_tx_info of the frame.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003909 * @rts: The buffer where to store the RTS frame.
3910 *
3911 * If the RTS frames are generated by the host system (i.e., not in
3912 * hardware/firmware), the low-level driver uses this function to receive
3913 * the next RTS frame from the 802.11 code. The low-level is responsible
3914 * for calling this function before and RTS frame is needed.
3915 */
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01003916void ieee80211_rts_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003917 const void *frame, size_t frame_len,
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02003918 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *frame_txctl,
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003919 struct ieee80211_rts *rts);
3920
3921/**
3922 * ieee80211_rts_duration - Get the duration field for an RTS frame
3923 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
Johannes Berg1ed32e42009-12-23 13:15:45 +01003924 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003925 * @frame_len: the length of the frame that is going to be protected by the RTS.
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02003926 * @frame_txctl: &struct ieee80211_tx_info of the frame.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003927 *
3928 * If the RTS is generated in firmware, but the host system must provide
3929 * the duration field, the low-level driver uses this function to receive
3930 * the duration field value in little-endian byteorder.
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01003931 *
3932 * Return: The duration.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003933 */
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01003934__le16 ieee80211_rts_duration(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3935 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, size_t frame_len,
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02003936 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *frame_txctl);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003937
3938/**
3939 * ieee80211_ctstoself_get - CTS-to-self frame generation function
3940 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
Johannes Berg1ed32e42009-12-23 13:15:45 +01003941 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003942 * @frame: pointer to the frame that is going to be protected by the CTS-to-self.
3943 * @frame_len: the frame length (in octets).
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02003944 * @frame_txctl: &struct ieee80211_tx_info of the frame.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003945 * @cts: The buffer where to store the CTS-to-self frame.
3946 *
3947 * If the CTS-to-self frames are generated by the host system (i.e., not in
3948 * hardware/firmware), the low-level driver uses this function to receive
3949 * the next CTS-to-self frame from the 802.11 code. The low-level is responsible
3950 * for calling this function before and CTS-to-self frame is needed.
3951 */
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01003952void ieee80211_ctstoself_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3953 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003954 const void *frame, size_t frame_len,
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02003955 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *frame_txctl,
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003956 struct ieee80211_cts *cts);
3957
3958/**
3959 * ieee80211_ctstoself_duration - Get the duration field for a CTS-to-self frame
3960 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
Johannes Berg1ed32e42009-12-23 13:15:45 +01003961 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003962 * @frame_len: the length of the frame that is going to be protected by the CTS-to-self.
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02003963 * @frame_txctl: &struct ieee80211_tx_info of the frame.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003964 *
3965 * If the CTS-to-self is generated in firmware, but the host system must provide
3966 * the duration field, the low-level driver uses this function to receive
3967 * the duration field value in little-endian byteorder.
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01003968 *
3969 * Return: The duration.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003970 */
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01003971__le16 ieee80211_ctstoself_duration(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3972 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003973 size_t frame_len,
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02003974 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *frame_txctl);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003975
3976/**
3977 * ieee80211_generic_frame_duration - Calculate the duration field for a frame
3978 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
Johannes Berg1ed32e42009-12-23 13:15:45 +01003979 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
Johannes Bergd13e1412012-06-09 10:31:09 +02003980 * @band: the band to calculate the frame duration on
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003981 * @frame_len: the length of the frame.
Johannes Berg8318d782008-01-24 19:38:38 +01003982 * @rate: the rate at which the frame is going to be transmitted.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003983 *
3984 * Calculate the duration field of some generic frame, given its
3985 * length and transmission rate (in 100kbps).
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01003986 *
3987 * Return: The duration.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003988 */
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01003989__le16 ieee80211_generic_frame_duration(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3990 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
Michal Kazior4ee73f32012-04-11 08:47:56 +02003991 enum ieee80211_band band,
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003992 size_t frame_len,
Johannes Berg8318d782008-01-24 19:38:38 +01003993 struct ieee80211_rate *rate);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003994
3995/**
3996 * ieee80211_get_buffered_bc - accessing buffered broadcast and multicast frames
3997 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
Johannes Berg1ed32e42009-12-23 13:15:45 +01003998 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003999 *
4000 * Function for accessing buffered broadcast and multicast frames. If
4001 * hardware/firmware does not implement buffering of broadcast/multicast
4002 * frames when power saving is used, 802.11 code buffers them in the host
4003 * memory. The low-level driver uses this function to fetch next buffered
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01004004 * frame. In most cases, this is used when generating beacon frame.
4005 *
4006 * Return: A pointer to the next buffered skb or NULL if no more buffered
4007 * frames are available.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004008 *
4009 * Note: buffered frames are returned only after DTIM beacon frame was
4010 * generated with ieee80211_beacon_get() and the low-level driver must thus
4011 * call ieee80211_beacon_get() first. ieee80211_get_buffered_bc() returns
4012 * NULL if the previous generated beacon was not DTIM, so the low-level driver
4013 * does not need to check for DTIM beacons separately and should be able to
4014 * use common code for all beacons.
4015 */
4016struct sk_buff *
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02004017ieee80211_get_buffered_bc(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004018
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04004019/**
Johannes Berg42d98792011-07-07 18:58:01 +02004020 * ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k_iv - get a TKIP phase 1 key for IV32
4021 *
4022 * This function returns the TKIP phase 1 key for the given IV32.
4023 *
4024 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
4025 * @iv32: IV32 to get the P1K for
4026 * @p1k: a buffer to which the key will be written, as 5 u16 values
4027 */
4028void ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k_iv(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
4029 u32 iv32, u16 *p1k);
4030
4031/**
Johannes Berg523b02e2011-07-07 22:28:01 +02004032 * ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k - get a TKIP phase 1 key
Emmanuel Grumbach5d2cdcd2008-03-20 15:06:41 +02004033 *
Johannes Berg523b02e2011-07-07 22:28:01 +02004034 * This function returns the TKIP phase 1 key for the IV32 taken
4035 * from the given packet.
Emmanuel Grumbach5d2cdcd2008-03-20 15:06:41 +02004036 *
4037 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
Johannes Berg523b02e2011-07-07 22:28:01 +02004038 * @skb: the packet to take the IV32 value from that will be encrypted
4039 * with this P1K
4040 * @p1k: a buffer to which the key will be written, as 5 u16 values
Emmanuel Grumbach5d2cdcd2008-03-20 15:06:41 +02004041 */
Johannes Berg42d98792011-07-07 18:58:01 +02004042static inline void ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
4043 struct sk_buff *skb, u16 *p1k)
4044{
4045 struct ieee80211_hdr *hdr = (struct ieee80211_hdr *)skb->data;
4046 const u8 *data = (u8 *)hdr + ieee80211_hdrlen(hdr->frame_control);
4047 u32 iv32 = get_unaligned_le32(&data[4]);
4048
4049 ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k_iv(keyconf, iv32, p1k);
4050}
Johannes Berg523b02e2011-07-07 22:28:01 +02004051
4052/**
Johannes Berg8bca5d82011-07-13 19:50:34 +02004053 * ieee80211_get_tkip_rx_p1k - get a TKIP phase 1 key for RX
4054 *
4055 * This function returns the TKIP phase 1 key for the given IV32
4056 * and transmitter address.
4057 *
4058 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
4059 * @ta: TA that will be used with the key
4060 * @iv32: IV32 to get the P1K for
4061 * @p1k: a buffer to which the key will be written, as 5 u16 values
4062 */
4063void ieee80211_get_tkip_rx_p1k(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
4064 const u8 *ta, u32 iv32, u16 *p1k);
4065
4066/**
Johannes Berg523b02e2011-07-07 22:28:01 +02004067 * ieee80211_get_tkip_p2k - get a TKIP phase 2 key
4068 *
4069 * This function computes the TKIP RC4 key for the IV values
4070 * in the packet.
4071 *
4072 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
4073 * @skb: the packet to take the IV32/IV16 values from that will be
4074 * encrypted with this key
4075 * @p2k: a buffer to which the key will be written, 16 bytes
4076 */
4077void ieee80211_get_tkip_p2k(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
4078 struct sk_buff *skb, u8 *p2k);
Johannes Bergc68f4b82011-07-05 16:35:41 +02004079
4080/**
Assaf Krauss5d0d04e2012-08-01 15:12:48 +03004081 * ieee80211_aes_cmac_calculate_k1_k2 - calculate the AES-CMAC sub keys
4082 *
4083 * This function computes the two AES-CMAC sub-keys, based on the
4084 * previously installed master key.
4085 *
4086 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
4087 * @k1: a buffer to be filled with the 1st sub-key
4088 * @k2: a buffer to be filled with the 2nd sub-key
4089 */
4090void ieee80211_aes_cmac_calculate_k1_k2(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
4091 u8 *k1, u8 *k2);
4092
4093/**
Johannes Berg3ea542d2011-07-07 18:58:00 +02004094 * struct ieee80211_key_seq - key sequence counter
4095 *
4096 * @tkip: TKIP data, containing IV32 and IV16 in host byte order
4097 * @ccmp: PN data, most significant byte first (big endian,
4098 * reverse order than in packet)
4099 * @aes_cmac: PN data, most significant byte first (big endian,
4100 * reverse order than in packet)
Jouni Malinen8ade5382015-01-24 19:52:09 +02004101 * @aes_gmac: PN data, most significant byte first (big endian,
4102 * reverse order than in packet)
Jouni Malinen00b9cfa2015-01-24 19:52:06 +02004103 * @gcmp: PN data, most significant byte first (big endian,
4104 * reverse order than in packet)
Johannes Berg3ea542d2011-07-07 18:58:00 +02004105 */
4106struct ieee80211_key_seq {
4107 union {
4108 struct {
4109 u32 iv32;
4110 u16 iv16;
4111 } tkip;
4112 struct {
4113 u8 pn[6];
4114 } ccmp;
4115 struct {
4116 u8 pn[6];
4117 } aes_cmac;
Jouni Malinen00b9cfa2015-01-24 19:52:06 +02004118 struct {
4119 u8 pn[6];
Jouni Malinen8ade5382015-01-24 19:52:09 +02004120 } aes_gmac;
4121 struct {
4122 u8 pn[6];
Jouni Malinen00b9cfa2015-01-24 19:52:06 +02004123 } gcmp;
Johannes Berg3ea542d2011-07-07 18:58:00 +02004124 };
4125};
4126
4127/**
4128 * ieee80211_get_key_tx_seq - get key TX sequence counter
4129 *
4130 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
4131 * @seq: buffer to receive the sequence data
4132 *
4133 * This function allows a driver to retrieve the current TX IV/PN
4134 * for the given key. It must not be called if IV generation is
4135 * offloaded to the device.
4136 *
4137 * Note that this function may only be called when no TX processing
4138 * can be done concurrently, for example when queues are stopped
4139 * and the stop has been synchronized.
4140 */
4141void ieee80211_get_key_tx_seq(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
4142 struct ieee80211_key_seq *seq);
4143
4144/**
4145 * ieee80211_get_key_rx_seq - get key RX sequence counter
4146 *
4147 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
Jouni Malinen00b9cfa2015-01-24 19:52:06 +02004148 * @tid: The TID, or -1 for the management frame value (CCMP/GCMP only);
Johannes Berg3ea542d2011-07-07 18:58:00 +02004149 * the value on TID 0 is also used for non-QoS frames. For
4150 * CMAC, only TID 0 is valid.
4151 * @seq: buffer to receive the sequence data
4152 *
4153 * This function allows a driver to retrieve the current RX IV/PNs
4154 * for the given key. It must not be called if IV checking is done
4155 * by the device and not by mac80211.
4156 *
4157 * Note that this function may only be called when no RX processing
4158 * can be done concurrently.
4159 */
4160void ieee80211_get_key_rx_seq(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
4161 int tid, struct ieee80211_key_seq *seq);
4162
4163/**
Johannes Berg27b3eb92013-08-07 20:11:55 +02004164 * ieee80211_set_key_tx_seq - set key TX sequence counter
4165 *
4166 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
4167 * @seq: new sequence data
4168 *
4169 * This function allows a driver to set the current TX IV/PNs for the
4170 * given key. This is useful when resuming from WoWLAN sleep and the
4171 * device may have transmitted frames using the PTK, e.g. replies to
4172 * ARP requests.
4173 *
4174 * Note that this function may only be called when no TX processing
4175 * can be done concurrently.
4176 */
4177void ieee80211_set_key_tx_seq(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
4178 struct ieee80211_key_seq *seq);
4179
4180/**
4181 * ieee80211_set_key_rx_seq - set key RX sequence counter
4182 *
4183 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
Jouni Malinen00b9cfa2015-01-24 19:52:06 +02004184 * @tid: The TID, or -1 for the management frame value (CCMP/GCMP only);
Johannes Berg27b3eb92013-08-07 20:11:55 +02004185 * the value on TID 0 is also used for non-QoS frames. For
4186 * CMAC, only TID 0 is valid.
4187 * @seq: new sequence data
4188 *
4189 * This function allows a driver to set the current RX IV/PNs for the
4190 * given key. This is useful when resuming from WoWLAN sleep and GTK
4191 * rekey may have been done while suspended. It should not be called
4192 * if IV checking is done by the device and not by mac80211.
4193 *
4194 * Note that this function may only be called when no RX processing
4195 * can be done concurrently.
4196 */
4197void ieee80211_set_key_rx_seq(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
4198 int tid, struct ieee80211_key_seq *seq);
4199
4200/**
4201 * ieee80211_remove_key - remove the given key
4202 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
4203 *
4204 * Remove the given key. If the key was uploaded to the hardware at the
4205 * time this function is called, it is not deleted in the hardware but
4206 * instead assumed to have been removed already.
4207 *
4208 * Note that due to locking considerations this function can (currently)
4209 * only be called during key iteration (ieee80211_iter_keys().)
4210 */
4211void ieee80211_remove_key(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf);
4212
4213/**
4214 * ieee80211_gtk_rekey_add - add a GTK key from rekeying during WoWLAN
4215 * @vif: the virtual interface to add the key on
4216 * @keyconf: new key data
4217 *
4218 * When GTK rekeying was done while the system was suspended, (a) new
4219 * key(s) will be available. These will be needed by mac80211 for proper
4220 * RX processing, so this function allows setting them.
4221 *
4222 * The function returns the newly allocated key structure, which will
4223 * have similar contents to the passed key configuration but point to
4224 * mac80211-owned memory. In case of errors, the function returns an
4225 * ERR_PTR(), use IS_ERR() etc.
4226 *
4227 * Note that this function assumes the key isn't added to hardware
4228 * acceleration, so no TX will be done with the key. Since it's a GTK
4229 * on managed (station) networks, this is true anyway. If the driver
4230 * calls this function from the resume callback and subsequently uses
4231 * the return code 1 to reconfigure the device, this key will be part
4232 * of the reconfiguration.
4233 *
4234 * Note that the driver should also call ieee80211_set_key_rx_seq()
4235 * for the new key for each TID to set up sequence counters properly.
4236 *
4237 * IMPORTANT: If this replaces a key that is present in the hardware,
4238 * then it will attempt to remove it during this call. In many cases
4239 * this isn't what you want, so call ieee80211_remove_key() first for
4240 * the key that's being replaced.
4241 */
4242struct ieee80211_key_conf *
4243ieee80211_gtk_rekey_add(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4244 struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf);
4245
4246/**
Johannes Bergc68f4b82011-07-05 16:35:41 +02004247 * ieee80211_gtk_rekey_notify - notify userspace supplicant of rekeying
4248 * @vif: virtual interface the rekeying was done on
4249 * @bssid: The BSSID of the AP, for checking association
4250 * @replay_ctr: the new replay counter after GTK rekeying
4251 * @gfp: allocation flags
4252 */
4253void ieee80211_gtk_rekey_notify(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, const u8 *bssid,
4254 const u8 *replay_ctr, gfp_t gfp);
4255
Emmanuel Grumbach5d2cdcd2008-03-20 15:06:41 +02004256/**
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004257 * ieee80211_wake_queue - wake specific queue
4258 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4259 * @queue: queue number (counted from zero).
4260 *
4261 * Drivers should use this function instead of netif_wake_queue.
4262 */
4263void ieee80211_wake_queue(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, int queue);
4264
4265/**
4266 * ieee80211_stop_queue - stop specific queue
4267 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4268 * @queue: queue number (counted from zero).
4269 *
4270 * Drivers should use this function instead of netif_stop_queue.
4271 */
4272void ieee80211_stop_queue(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, int queue);
4273
4274/**
Tomas Winkler92ab8532008-07-24 21:02:04 +03004275 * ieee80211_queue_stopped - test status of the queue
4276 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4277 * @queue: queue number (counted from zero).
4278 *
4279 * Drivers should use this function instead of netif_stop_queue.
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01004280 *
4281 * Return: %true if the queue is stopped. %false otherwise.
Tomas Winkler92ab8532008-07-24 21:02:04 +03004282 */
4283
4284int ieee80211_queue_stopped(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, int queue);
4285
4286/**
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004287 * ieee80211_stop_queues - stop all queues
4288 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4289 *
4290 * Drivers should use this function instead of netif_stop_queue.
4291 */
4292void ieee80211_stop_queues(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4293
4294/**
4295 * ieee80211_wake_queues - wake all queues
4296 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4297 *
4298 * Drivers should use this function instead of netif_wake_queue.
4299 */
4300void ieee80211_wake_queues(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4301
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04004302/**
4303 * ieee80211_scan_completed - completed hardware scan
4304 *
4305 * When hardware scan offload is used (i.e. the hw_scan() callback is
4306 * assigned) this function needs to be called by the driver to notify
Johannes Berg8789d452010-08-26 13:30:26 +02004307 * mac80211 that the scan finished. This function can be called from
4308 * any context, including hardirq context.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04004309 *
4310 * @hw: the hardware that finished the scan
Johannes Berg2a519312009-02-10 21:25:55 +01004311 * @aborted: set to true if scan was aborted
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04004312 */
Johannes Berg2a519312009-02-10 21:25:55 +01004313void ieee80211_scan_completed(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, bool aborted);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004314
Johannes Bergdabeb342007-11-09 01:57:29 +01004315/**
Luciano Coelho79f460c2011-05-11 17:09:36 +03004316 * ieee80211_sched_scan_results - got results from scheduled scan
4317 *
4318 * When a scheduled scan is running, this function needs to be called by the
4319 * driver whenever there are new scan results available.
4320 *
4321 * @hw: the hardware that is performing scheduled scans
4322 */
4323void ieee80211_sched_scan_results(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4324
4325/**
4326 * ieee80211_sched_scan_stopped - inform that the scheduled scan has stopped
4327 *
4328 * When a scheduled scan is running, this function can be called by
4329 * the driver if it needs to stop the scan to perform another task.
4330 * Usual scenarios are drivers that cannot continue the scheduled scan
4331 * while associating, for instance.
4332 *
4333 * @hw: the hardware that is performing scheduled scans
4334 */
4335void ieee80211_sched_scan_stopped(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4336
4337/**
Johannes Berg8b2c9822012-11-06 20:23:30 +01004338 * enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags - interface iteration flags
4339 * @IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_NORMAL: Iterate over all interfaces that have
4340 * been added to the driver; However, note that during hardware
4341 * reconfiguration (after restart_hw) it will iterate over a new
4342 * interface and over all the existing interfaces even if they
4343 * haven't been re-added to the driver yet.
4344 * @IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_RESUME_ALL: During resume, iterate over all
4345 * interfaces, even if they haven't been re-added to the driver yet.
4346 */
4347enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags {
4348 IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_NORMAL = 0,
4349 IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_RESUME_ALL = BIT(0),
4350};
4351
4352/**
Randy Dunlap6ef307b2008-07-03 13:52:18 -07004353 * ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces - iterate active interfaces
Johannes Bergdabeb342007-11-09 01:57:29 +01004354 *
4355 * This function iterates over the interfaces associated with a given
4356 * hardware that are currently active and calls the callback for them.
Ivo van Doorn2f561fe2008-05-10 13:40:49 +02004357 * This function allows the iterator function to sleep, when the iterator
4358 * function is atomic @ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces_atomic can
4359 * be used.
Johannes Berg8b2c9822012-11-06 20:23:30 +01004360 * Does not iterate over a new interface during add_interface().
Johannes Bergdabeb342007-11-09 01:57:29 +01004361 *
4362 * @hw: the hardware struct of which the interfaces should be iterated over
Johannes Berg8b2c9822012-11-06 20:23:30 +01004363 * @iter_flags: iteration flags, see &enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags
Ivo van Doorn2f561fe2008-05-10 13:40:49 +02004364 * @iterator: the iterator function to call
Johannes Bergdabeb342007-11-09 01:57:29 +01004365 * @data: first argument of the iterator function
4366 */
4367void ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Johannes Berg8b2c9822012-11-06 20:23:30 +01004368 u32 iter_flags,
Johannes Bergdabeb342007-11-09 01:57:29 +01004369 void (*iterator)(void *data, u8 *mac,
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01004370 struct ieee80211_vif *vif),
Johannes Bergdabeb342007-11-09 01:57:29 +01004371 void *data);
4372
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02004373/**
Ivo van Doorn2f561fe2008-05-10 13:40:49 +02004374 * ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces_atomic - iterate active interfaces
4375 *
4376 * This function iterates over the interfaces associated with a given
4377 * hardware that are currently active and calls the callback for them.
4378 * This function requires the iterator callback function to be atomic,
4379 * if that is not desired, use @ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces instead.
Johannes Berg8b2c9822012-11-06 20:23:30 +01004380 * Does not iterate over a new interface during add_interface().
Ivo van Doorn2f561fe2008-05-10 13:40:49 +02004381 *
4382 * @hw: the hardware struct of which the interfaces should be iterated over
Johannes Berg8b2c9822012-11-06 20:23:30 +01004383 * @iter_flags: iteration flags, see &enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags
Ivo van Doorn2f561fe2008-05-10 13:40:49 +02004384 * @iterator: the iterator function to call, cannot sleep
4385 * @data: first argument of the iterator function
4386 */
4387void ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces_atomic(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Johannes Berg8b2c9822012-11-06 20:23:30 +01004388 u32 iter_flags,
Ivo van Doorn2f561fe2008-05-10 13:40:49 +02004389 void (*iterator)(void *data,
4390 u8 *mac,
4391 struct ieee80211_vif *vif),
4392 void *data);
4393
4394/**
Johannes Bergc7c71062013-08-21 22:07:20 +02004395 * ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces_rtnl - iterate active interfaces
4396 *
4397 * This function iterates over the interfaces associated with a given
4398 * hardware that are currently active and calls the callback for them.
4399 * This version can only be used while holding the RTNL.
4400 *
4401 * @hw: the hardware struct of which the interfaces should be iterated over
4402 * @iter_flags: iteration flags, see &enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags
4403 * @iterator: the iterator function to call, cannot sleep
4404 * @data: first argument of the iterator function
4405 */
4406void ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces_rtnl(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4407 u32 iter_flags,
4408 void (*iterator)(void *data,
4409 u8 *mac,
4410 struct ieee80211_vif *vif),
4411 void *data);
4412
4413/**
Arik Nemtsov0fc1e042014-10-22 12:30:59 +03004414 * ieee80211_iterate_stations_atomic - iterate stations
4415 *
4416 * This function iterates over all stations associated with a given
4417 * hardware that are currently uploaded to the driver and calls the callback
4418 * function for them.
4419 * This function requires the iterator callback function to be atomic,
4420 *
4421 * @hw: the hardware struct of which the interfaces should be iterated over
4422 * @iterator: the iterator function to call, cannot sleep
4423 * @data: first argument of the iterator function
4424 */
4425void ieee80211_iterate_stations_atomic(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4426 void (*iterator)(void *data,
4427 struct ieee80211_sta *sta),
4428 void *data);
4429/**
Luis R. Rodriguez42935ec2009-07-29 20:08:07 -04004430 * ieee80211_queue_work - add work onto the mac80211 workqueue
4431 *
4432 * Drivers and mac80211 use this to add work onto the mac80211 workqueue.
4433 * This helper ensures drivers are not queueing work when they should not be.
4434 *
4435 * @hw: the hardware struct for the interface we are adding work for
4436 * @work: the work we want to add onto the mac80211 workqueue
4437 */
4438void ieee80211_queue_work(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct work_struct *work);
4439
4440/**
4441 * ieee80211_queue_delayed_work - add work onto the mac80211 workqueue
4442 *
4443 * Drivers and mac80211 use this to queue delayed work onto the mac80211
4444 * workqueue.
4445 *
4446 * @hw: the hardware struct for the interface we are adding work for
4447 * @dwork: delayable work to queue onto the mac80211 workqueue
4448 * @delay: number of jiffies to wait before queueing
4449 */
4450void ieee80211_queue_delayed_work(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4451 struct delayed_work *dwork,
4452 unsigned long delay);
4453
4454/**
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02004455 * ieee80211_start_tx_ba_session - Start a tx Block Ack session.
Johannes Bergc951ad32009-11-16 12:00:38 +01004456 * @sta: the station for which to start a BA session
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02004457 * @tid: the TID to BA on.
Sujith Manoharanbd2ce6e2010-12-15 07:47:10 +05304458 * @timeout: session timeout value (in TUs)
Randy Dunlapea2d8b52008-10-27 09:47:03 -07004459 *
4460 * Return: success if addBA request was sent, failure otherwise
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02004461 *
4462 * Although mac80211/low level driver/user space application can estimate
4463 * the need to start aggregation on a certain RA/TID, the session level
4464 * will be managed by the mac80211.
4465 */
Sujith Manoharanbd2ce6e2010-12-15 07:47:10 +05304466int ieee80211_start_tx_ba_session(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u16 tid,
4467 u16 timeout);
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02004468
4469/**
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02004470 * ieee80211_start_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe - low level driver ready to aggregate.
Johannes Berg1ed32e42009-12-23 13:15:45 +01004471 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02004472 * @ra: receiver address of the BA session recipient.
4473 * @tid: the TID to BA on.
4474 *
4475 * This function must be called by low level driver once it has
Johannes Berg5d22c892010-06-10 10:21:40 +02004476 * finished with preparations for the BA session. It can be called
4477 * from any context.
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02004478 */
Johannes Bergc951ad32009-11-16 12:00:38 +01004479void ieee80211_start_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, const u8 *ra,
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02004480 u16 tid);
4481
4482/**
4483 * ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_session - Stop a Block Ack session.
Johannes Bergc951ad32009-11-16 12:00:38 +01004484 * @sta: the station whose BA session to stop
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02004485 * @tid: the TID to stop BA.
Randy Dunlapea2d8b52008-10-27 09:47:03 -07004486 *
Johannes Berg6a8579d2010-05-27 14:41:07 +02004487 * Return: negative error if the TID is invalid, or no aggregation active
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02004488 *
4489 * Although mac80211/low level driver/user space application can estimate
4490 * the need to stop aggregation on a certain RA/TID, the session level
4491 * will be managed by the mac80211.
4492 */
Johannes Berg6a8579d2010-05-27 14:41:07 +02004493int ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_session(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u16 tid);
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02004494
4495/**
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02004496 * ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe - low level driver ready to stop aggregate.
Johannes Berg1ed32e42009-12-23 13:15:45 +01004497 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02004498 * @ra: receiver address of the BA session recipient.
4499 * @tid: the desired TID to BA on.
4500 *
4501 * This function must be called by low level driver once it has
Johannes Berg5d22c892010-06-10 10:21:40 +02004502 * finished with preparations for the BA session tear down. It
4503 * can be called from any context.
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02004504 */
Johannes Bergc951ad32009-11-16 12:00:38 +01004505void ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, const u8 *ra,
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02004506 u16 tid);
4507
Mohamed Abbas84363e62008-04-04 16:59:58 -07004508/**
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02004509 * ieee80211_find_sta - find a station
4510 *
Johannes Berg5ed176e2009-11-04 14:42:28 +01004511 * @vif: virtual interface to look for station on
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02004512 * @addr: station's address
4513 *
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01004514 * Return: The station, if found. %NULL otherwise.
4515 *
4516 * Note: This function must be called under RCU lock and the
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02004517 * resulting pointer is only valid under RCU lock as well.
4518 */
Johannes Berg5ed176e2009-11-04 14:42:28 +01004519struct ieee80211_sta *ieee80211_find_sta(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02004520 const u8 *addr);
4521
Kalle Valo04de8382009-03-22 21:57:35 +02004522/**
Ben Greear686b9cb2010-09-23 09:44:36 -07004523 * ieee80211_find_sta_by_ifaddr - find a station on hardware
Johannes Berg5ed176e2009-11-04 14:42:28 +01004524 *
4525 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
Ben Greear686b9cb2010-09-23 09:44:36 -07004526 * @addr: remote station's address
4527 * @localaddr: local address (vif->sdata->vif.addr). Use NULL for 'any'.
Johannes Berg5ed176e2009-11-04 14:42:28 +01004528 *
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01004529 * Return: The station, if found. %NULL otherwise.
4530 *
4531 * Note: This function must be called under RCU lock and the
Johannes Berg5ed176e2009-11-04 14:42:28 +01004532 * resulting pointer is only valid under RCU lock as well.
4533 *
Ben Greear686b9cb2010-09-23 09:44:36 -07004534 * NOTE: You may pass NULL for localaddr, but then you will just get
4535 * the first STA that matches the remote address 'addr'.
4536 * We can have multiple STA associated with multiple
4537 * logical stations (e.g. consider a station connecting to another
4538 * BSSID on the same AP hardware without disconnecting first).
4539 * In this case, the result of this method with localaddr NULL
4540 * is not reliable.
Johannes Berg5ed176e2009-11-04 14:42:28 +01004541 *
Ben Greear686b9cb2010-09-23 09:44:36 -07004542 * DO NOT USE THIS FUNCTION with localaddr NULL if at all possible.
Johannes Berg5ed176e2009-11-04 14:42:28 +01004543 */
Ben Greear686b9cb2010-09-23 09:44:36 -07004544struct ieee80211_sta *ieee80211_find_sta_by_ifaddr(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4545 const u8 *addr,
4546 const u8 *localaddr);
Johannes Berg5ed176e2009-11-04 14:42:28 +01004547
4548/**
Johannes Bergaf818582009-11-06 11:35:50 +01004549 * ieee80211_sta_block_awake - block station from waking up
4550 * @hw: the hardware
4551 * @pubsta: the station
4552 * @block: whether to block or unblock
4553 *
4554 * Some devices require that all frames that are on the queues
4555 * for a specific station that went to sleep are flushed before
4556 * a poll response or frames after the station woke up can be
4557 * delivered to that it. Note that such frames must be rejected
4558 * by the driver as filtered, with the appropriate status flag.
4559 *
4560 * This function allows implementing this mode in a race-free
4561 * manner.
4562 *
4563 * To do this, a driver must keep track of the number of frames
4564 * still enqueued for a specific station. If this number is not
4565 * zero when the station goes to sleep, the driver must call
4566 * this function to force mac80211 to consider the station to
4567 * be asleep regardless of the station's actual state. Once the
4568 * number of outstanding frames reaches zero, the driver must
4569 * call this function again to unblock the station. That will
4570 * cause mac80211 to be able to send ps-poll responses, and if
4571 * the station queried in the meantime then frames will also
4572 * be sent out as a result of this. Additionally, the driver
4573 * will be notified that the station woke up some time after
4574 * it is unblocked, regardless of whether the station actually
4575 * woke up while blocked or not.
4576 */
4577void ieee80211_sta_block_awake(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4578 struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta, bool block);
4579
4580/**
Johannes Berg37fbd902011-09-29 16:04:39 +02004581 * ieee80211_sta_eosp - notify mac80211 about end of SP
4582 * @pubsta: the station
4583 *
4584 * When a device transmits frames in a way that it can't tell
4585 * mac80211 in the TX status about the EOSP, it must clear the
4586 * %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP bit and call this function instead.
4587 * This applies for PS-Poll as well as uAPSD.
4588 *
Johannes Berge9437892013-02-15 21:38:08 +01004589 * Note that just like with _tx_status() and _rx() drivers must
4590 * not mix calls to irqsafe/non-irqsafe versions, this function
4591 * must not be mixed with those either. Use the all irqsafe, or
4592 * all non-irqsafe, don't mix!
4593 *
4594 * NB: the _irqsafe version of this function doesn't exist, no
4595 * driver needs it right now. Don't call this function if
4596 * you'd need the _irqsafe version, look at the git history
4597 * and restore the _irqsafe version!
Johannes Berg37fbd902011-09-29 16:04:39 +02004598 */
Johannes Berge9437892013-02-15 21:38:08 +01004599void ieee80211_sta_eosp(struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta);
Johannes Berg37fbd902011-09-29 16:04:39 +02004600
4601/**
Johannes Berg830af022011-07-05 16:35:39 +02004602 * ieee80211_iter_keys - iterate keys programmed into the device
4603 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
4604 * @vif: virtual interface to iterate, may be %NULL for all
4605 * @iter: iterator function that will be called for each key
4606 * @iter_data: custom data to pass to the iterator function
4607 *
4608 * This function can be used to iterate all the keys known to
4609 * mac80211, even those that weren't previously programmed into
4610 * the device. This is intended for use in WoWLAN if the device
4611 * needs reprogramming of the keys during suspend. Note that due
4612 * to locking reasons, it is also only safe to call this at few
4613 * spots since it must hold the RTNL and be able to sleep.
Johannes Bergf850e002011-07-13 19:50:53 +02004614 *
4615 * The order in which the keys are iterated matches the order
4616 * in which they were originally installed and handed to the
4617 * set_key callback.
Johannes Berg830af022011-07-05 16:35:39 +02004618 */
4619void ieee80211_iter_keys(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4620 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4621 void (*iter)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4622 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4623 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4624 struct ieee80211_key_conf *key,
4625 void *data),
4626 void *iter_data);
4627
4628/**
Johannes Berg3448c002012-09-11 17:57:42 +02004629 * ieee80211_iter_chan_contexts_atomic - iterate channel contexts
4630 * @hw: pointre obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4631 * @iter: iterator function
4632 * @iter_data: data passed to iterator function
4633 *
4634 * Iterate all active channel contexts. This function is atomic and
4635 * doesn't acquire any locks internally that might be held in other
4636 * places while calling into the driver.
4637 *
4638 * The iterator will not find a context that's being added (during
4639 * the driver callback to add it) but will find it while it's being
4640 * removed.
Johannes Berg8a61af62012-12-13 17:42:30 +01004641 *
4642 * Note that during hardware restart, all contexts that existed
4643 * before the restart are considered already present so will be
4644 * found while iterating, whether they've been re-added already
4645 * or not.
Johannes Berg3448c002012-09-11 17:57:42 +02004646 */
4647void ieee80211_iter_chan_contexts_atomic(
4648 struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4649 void (*iter)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4650 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *chanctx_conf,
4651 void *data),
4652 void *iter_data);
4653
4654/**
Juuso Oikarinena619a4c2010-11-11 08:50:18 +02004655 * ieee80211_ap_probereq_get - retrieve a Probe Request template
4656 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4657 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4658 *
4659 * Creates a Probe Request template which can, for example, be uploaded to
4660 * hardware. The template is filled with bssid, ssid and supported rate
4661 * information. This function must only be called from within the
4662 * .bss_info_changed callback function and only in managed mode. The function
4663 * is only useful when the interface is associated, otherwise it will return
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01004664 * %NULL.
4665 *
4666 * Return: The Probe Request template. %NULL on error.
Juuso Oikarinena619a4c2010-11-11 08:50:18 +02004667 */
4668struct sk_buff *ieee80211_ap_probereq_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4669 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4670
4671/**
Kalle Valo04de8382009-03-22 21:57:35 +02004672 * ieee80211_beacon_loss - inform hardware does not receive beacons
4673 *
Johannes Berg1ed32e42009-12-23 13:15:45 +01004674 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
Kalle Valo04de8382009-03-22 21:57:35 +02004675 *
Johannes Bergc1288b12012-01-19 09:29:57 +01004676 * When beacon filtering is enabled with %IEEE80211_VIF_BEACON_FILTER and
Juuso Oikarinen1e4dcd02010-03-19 07:14:53 +02004677 * %IEEE80211_CONF_PS is set, the driver needs to inform whenever the
Kalle Valo04de8382009-03-22 21:57:35 +02004678 * hardware is not receiving beacons with this function.
4679 */
4680void ieee80211_beacon_loss(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02004681
Juuso Oikarinen1e4dcd02010-03-19 07:14:53 +02004682/**
4683 * ieee80211_connection_loss - inform hardware has lost connection to the AP
4684 *
4685 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4686 *
Johannes Bergc1288b12012-01-19 09:29:57 +01004687 * When beacon filtering is enabled with %IEEE80211_VIF_BEACON_FILTER, and
Juuso Oikarinen1e4dcd02010-03-19 07:14:53 +02004688 * %IEEE80211_CONF_PS and %IEEE80211_HW_CONNECTION_MONITOR are set, the driver
4689 * needs to inform if the connection to the AP has been lost.
Johannes Berg682bd382013-01-29 13:13:50 +01004690 * The function may also be called if the connection needs to be terminated
4691 * for some other reason, even if %IEEE80211_HW_CONNECTION_MONITOR isn't set.
Juuso Oikarinen1e4dcd02010-03-19 07:14:53 +02004692 *
4693 * This function will cause immediate change to disassociated state,
4694 * without connection recovery attempts.
4695 */
4696void ieee80211_connection_loss(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4697
Juuso Oikarinena97c13c2010-03-23 09:02:34 +02004698/**
Johannes Berg95acac62011-07-12 12:30:59 +02004699 * ieee80211_resume_disconnect - disconnect from AP after resume
4700 *
4701 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4702 *
4703 * Instructs mac80211 to disconnect from the AP after resume.
4704 * Drivers can use this after WoWLAN if they know that the
4705 * connection cannot be kept up, for example because keys were
4706 * used while the device was asleep but the replay counters or
4707 * similar cannot be retrieved from the device during resume.
4708 *
4709 * Note that due to implementation issues, if the driver uses
4710 * the reconfiguration functionality during resume the interface
4711 * will still be added as associated first during resume and then
4712 * disconnect normally later.
4713 *
4714 * This function can only be called from the resume callback and
4715 * the driver must not be holding any of its own locks while it
4716 * calls this function, or at least not any locks it needs in the
4717 * key configuration paths (if it supports HW crypto).
4718 */
4719void ieee80211_resume_disconnect(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4720
4721/**
Juuso Oikarinena97c13c2010-03-23 09:02:34 +02004722 * ieee80211_cqm_rssi_notify - inform a configured connection quality monitoring
4723 * rssi threshold triggered
4724 *
4725 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4726 * @rssi_event: the RSSI trigger event type
4727 * @gfp: context flags
4728 *
Johannes Bergea086352012-01-19 09:29:58 +01004729 * When the %IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_CQM_RSSI is set, and a connection quality
Juuso Oikarinena97c13c2010-03-23 09:02:34 +02004730 * monitoring is configured with an rssi threshold, the driver will inform
4731 * whenever the rssi level reaches the threshold.
4732 */
4733void ieee80211_cqm_rssi_notify(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4734 enum nl80211_cqm_rssi_threshold_event rssi_event,
4735 gfp_t gfp);
4736
Johannes Berg5ce6e432010-05-11 16:20:57 +02004737/**
Johannes Berg98f03342014-11-26 12:42:02 +01004738 * ieee80211_cqm_beacon_loss_notify - inform CQM of beacon loss
4739 *
4740 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4741 * @gfp: context flags
4742 */
4743void ieee80211_cqm_beacon_loss_notify(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, gfp_t gfp);
4744
4745/**
Simon Wunderlich164eb022013-02-08 18:16:20 +01004746 * ieee80211_radar_detected - inform that a radar was detected
4747 *
4748 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
4749 */
4750void ieee80211_radar_detected(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4751
4752/**
Johannes Berg5ce6e432010-05-11 16:20:57 +02004753 * ieee80211_chswitch_done - Complete channel switch process
4754 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4755 * @success: make the channel switch successful or not
4756 *
4757 * Complete the channel switch post-process: set the new operational channel
4758 * and wake up the suspended queues.
4759 */
4760void ieee80211_chswitch_done(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, bool success);
4761
Johannes Bergd1f5b7a2010-08-05 17:05:55 +02004762/**
4763 * ieee80211_request_smps - request SM PS transition
4764 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
Johannes Berg633dd1e2010-08-18 15:01:23 +02004765 * @smps_mode: new SM PS mode
Johannes Bergd1f5b7a2010-08-05 17:05:55 +02004766 *
4767 * This allows the driver to request an SM PS transition in managed
4768 * mode. This is useful when the driver has more information than
4769 * the stack about possible interference, for example by bluetooth.
4770 */
4771void ieee80211_request_smps(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4772 enum ieee80211_smps_mode smps_mode);
4773
Johannes Berge31b8212010-10-05 19:39:30 +02004774/**
Johannes Berg21f83582010-12-18 17:20:47 +01004775 * ieee80211_ready_on_channel - notification of remain-on-channel start
4776 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
4777 */
4778void ieee80211_ready_on_channel(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4779
4780/**
4781 * ieee80211_remain_on_channel_expired - remain_on_channel duration expired
4782 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
4783 */
4784void ieee80211_remain_on_channel_expired(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4785
Shahar Levif41ccd72011-05-22 16:10:21 +03004786/**
4787 * ieee80211_stop_rx_ba_session - callback to stop existing BA sessions
4788 *
4789 * in order not to harm the system performance and user experience, the device
4790 * may request not to allow any rx ba session and tear down existing rx ba
4791 * sessions based on system constraints such as periodic BT activity that needs
4792 * to limit wlan activity (eg.sco or a2dp)."
4793 * in such cases, the intention is to limit the duration of the rx ppdu and
4794 * therefore prevent the peer device to use a-mpdu aggregation.
4795 *
4796 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4797 * @ba_rx_bitmap: Bit map of open rx ba per tid
4798 * @addr: & to bssid mac address
4799 */
4800void ieee80211_stop_rx_ba_session(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, u16 ba_rx_bitmap,
4801 const u8 *addr);
4802
Felix Fietkau8c771242011-08-20 15:53:55 +02004803/**
4804 * ieee80211_send_bar - send a BlockAckReq frame
4805 *
4806 * can be used to flush pending frames from the peer's aggregation reorder
4807 * buffer.
4808 *
4809 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4810 * @ra: the peer's destination address
4811 * @tid: the TID of the aggregation session
4812 * @ssn: the new starting sequence number for the receiver
4813 */
4814void ieee80211_send_bar(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, u8 *ra, u16 tid, u16 ssn);
4815
Michal Kazior08cf42e2014-07-16 12:12:15 +02004816/**
4817 * ieee80211_start_rx_ba_session_offl - start a Rx BA session
4818 *
4819 * Some device drivers may offload part of the Rx aggregation flow including
4820 * AddBa/DelBa negotiation but may otherwise be incapable of full Rx
4821 * reordering.
4822 *
4823 * Create structures responsible for reordering so device drivers may call here
4824 * when they complete AddBa negotiation.
4825 *
4826 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback
4827 * @addr: station mac address
4828 * @tid: the rx tid
4829 */
4830void ieee80211_start_rx_ba_session_offl(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4831 const u8 *addr, u16 tid);
4832
4833/**
4834 * ieee80211_stop_rx_ba_session_offl - stop a Rx BA session
4835 *
4836 * Some device drivers may offload part of the Rx aggregation flow including
4837 * AddBa/DelBa negotiation but may otherwise be incapable of full Rx
4838 * reordering.
4839 *
4840 * Destroy structures responsible for reordering so device drivers may call here
4841 * when they complete DelBa negotiation.
4842 *
4843 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback
4844 * @addr: station mac address
4845 * @tid: the rx tid
4846 */
4847void ieee80211_stop_rx_ba_session_offl(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4848 const u8 *addr, u16 tid);
4849
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02004850/* Rate control API */
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +02004851
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02004852/**
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +02004853 * struct ieee80211_tx_rate_control - rate control information for/from RC algo
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02004854 *
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +02004855 * @hw: The hardware the algorithm is invoked for.
4856 * @sband: The band this frame is being transmitted on.
4857 * @bss_conf: the current BSS configuration
Simon Wunderlichf44d4eb2012-03-07 21:31:13 +01004858 * @skb: the skb that will be transmitted, the control information in it needs
4859 * to be filled in
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +02004860 * @reported_rate: The rate control algorithm can fill this in to indicate
4861 * which rate should be reported to userspace as the current rate and
4862 * used for rate calculations in the mesh network.
4863 * @rts: whether RTS will be used for this frame because it is longer than the
4864 * RTS threshold
4865 * @short_preamble: whether mac80211 will request short-preamble transmission
4866 * if the selected rate supports it
Simon Wunderlichf44d4eb2012-03-07 21:31:13 +01004867 * @max_rate_idx: user-requested maximum (legacy) rate
Jouni Malinen37eb0b12010-01-06 13:09:08 +02004868 * (deprecated; this will be removed once drivers get updated to use
4869 * rate_idx_mask)
Simon Wunderlichf44d4eb2012-03-07 21:31:13 +01004870 * @rate_idx_mask: user-requested (legacy) rate mask
Felix Fietkau2ffbe6d2013-04-16 13:38:42 +02004871 * @rate_idx_mcs_mask: user-requested MCS rate mask (NULL if not in use)
Felix Fietkau8f0729b2010-11-11 15:07:23 +01004872 * @bss: whether this frame is sent out in AP or IBSS mode
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02004873 */
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +02004874struct ieee80211_tx_rate_control {
4875 struct ieee80211_hw *hw;
4876 struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband;
4877 struct ieee80211_bss_conf *bss_conf;
4878 struct sk_buff *skb;
4879 struct ieee80211_tx_rate reported_rate;
4880 bool rts, short_preamble;
4881 u8 max_rate_idx;
Jouni Malinen37eb0b12010-01-06 13:09:08 +02004882 u32 rate_idx_mask;
Felix Fietkau2ffbe6d2013-04-16 13:38:42 +02004883 u8 *rate_idx_mcs_mask;
Felix Fietkau8f0729b2010-11-11 15:07:23 +01004884 bool bss;
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02004885};
4886
4887struct rate_control_ops {
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02004888 const char *name;
4889 void *(*alloc)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct dentry *debugfsdir);
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02004890 void (*free)(void *priv);
4891
4892 void *(*alloc_sta)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_sta *sta, gfp_t gfp);
4893 void (*rate_init)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband,
Simon Wunderlich3de805c2013-07-08 16:55:50 +02004894 struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef,
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02004895 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, void *priv_sta);
Sujith81cb7622009-02-12 11:38:37 +05304896 void (*rate_update)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband,
Simon Wunderlich3de805c2013-07-08 16:55:50 +02004897 struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef,
Johannes Berg64f68e52012-03-28 10:58:37 +02004898 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, void *priv_sta,
4899 u32 changed);
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02004900 void (*free_sta)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4901 void *priv_sta);
4902
Felix Fietkauf6845652014-11-19 20:08:08 +01004903 void (*tx_status_noskb)(void *priv,
4904 struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband,
4905 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, void *priv_sta,
4906 struct ieee80211_tx_info *info);
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02004907 void (*tx_status)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband,
4908 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, void *priv_sta,
4909 struct sk_buff *skb);
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +02004910 void (*get_rate)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_sta *sta, void *priv_sta,
4911 struct ieee80211_tx_rate_control *txrc);
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02004912
4913 void (*add_sta_debugfs)(void *priv, void *priv_sta,
4914 struct dentry *dir);
4915 void (*remove_sta_debugfs)(void *priv, void *priv_sta);
Antonio Quartullicca674d2014-05-19 21:53:20 +02004916
4917 u32 (*get_expected_throughput)(void *priv_sta);
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02004918};
4919
4920static inline int rate_supported(struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4921 enum ieee80211_band band,
4922 int index)
4923{
4924 return (sta == NULL || sta->supp_rates[band] & BIT(index));
4925}
4926
Luis R. Rodriguez4c6d4f52009-07-16 10:05:41 -07004927/**
4928 * rate_control_send_low - helper for drivers for management/no-ack frames
4929 *
4930 * Rate control algorithms that agree to use the lowest rate to
4931 * send management frames and NO_ACK data with the respective hw
4932 * retries should use this in the beginning of their mac80211 get_rate
4933 * callback. If true is returned the rate control can simply return.
4934 * If false is returned we guarantee that sta and sta and priv_sta is
4935 * not null.
4936 *
4937 * Rate control algorithms wishing to do more intelligent selection of
4938 * rate for multicast/broadcast frames may choose to not use this.
4939 *
4940 * @sta: &struct ieee80211_sta pointer to the target destination. Note
4941 * that this may be null.
4942 * @priv_sta: private rate control structure. This may be null.
4943 * @txrc: rate control information we sholud populate for mac80211.
4944 */
4945bool rate_control_send_low(struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4946 void *priv_sta,
4947 struct ieee80211_tx_rate_control *txrc);
4948
4949
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02004950static inline s8
4951rate_lowest_index(struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband,
4952 struct ieee80211_sta *sta)
4953{
4954 int i;
4955
4956 for (i = 0; i < sband->n_bitrates; i++)
4957 if (rate_supported(sta, sband->band, i))
4958 return i;
4959
4960 /* warn when we cannot find a rate. */
Johannes Berg54d50262011-11-04 18:07:43 +01004961 WARN_ON_ONCE(1);
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02004962
Johannes Berg54d50262011-11-04 18:07:43 +01004963 /* and return 0 (the lowest index) */
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02004964 return 0;
4965}
4966
Luis R. Rodriguezb770b432009-07-16 10:15:09 -07004967static inline
4968bool rate_usable_index_exists(struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband,
4969 struct ieee80211_sta *sta)
4970{
4971 unsigned int i;
4972
4973 for (i = 0; i < sband->n_bitrates; i++)
4974 if (rate_supported(sta, sband->band, i))
4975 return true;
4976 return false;
4977}
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02004978
Felix Fietkau0d528d82013-04-22 16:14:41 +02004979/**
4980 * rate_control_set_rates - pass the sta rate selection to mac80211/driver
4981 *
4982 * When not doing a rate control probe to test rates, rate control should pass
4983 * its rate selection to mac80211. If the driver supports receiving a station
4984 * rate table, it will use it to ensure that frames are always sent based on
4985 * the most recent rate control module decision.
4986 *
4987 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
4988 * @pubsta: &struct ieee80211_sta pointer to the target destination.
4989 * @rates: new tx rate set to be used for this station.
4990 */
4991int rate_control_set_rates(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4992 struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta,
4993 struct ieee80211_sta_rates *rates);
4994
Johannes Berg631ad702014-01-20 23:29:34 +01004995int ieee80211_rate_control_register(const struct rate_control_ops *ops);
4996void ieee80211_rate_control_unregister(const struct rate_control_ops *ops);
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02004997
Luis R. Rodriguez10c806b2008-12-23 15:58:36 -08004998static inline bool
4999conf_is_ht20(struct ieee80211_conf *conf)
5000{
Karl Beldan675a0b02013-03-25 16:26:57 +01005001 return conf->chandef.width == NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_20;
Luis R. Rodriguez10c806b2008-12-23 15:58:36 -08005002}
5003
5004static inline bool
5005conf_is_ht40_minus(struct ieee80211_conf *conf)
5006{
Karl Beldan675a0b02013-03-25 16:26:57 +01005007 return conf->chandef.width == NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_40 &&
5008 conf->chandef.center_freq1 < conf->chandef.chan->center_freq;
Luis R. Rodriguez10c806b2008-12-23 15:58:36 -08005009}
5010
5011static inline bool
5012conf_is_ht40_plus(struct ieee80211_conf *conf)
5013{
Karl Beldan675a0b02013-03-25 16:26:57 +01005014 return conf->chandef.width == NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_40 &&
5015 conf->chandef.center_freq1 > conf->chandef.chan->center_freq;
Luis R. Rodriguez10c806b2008-12-23 15:58:36 -08005016}
5017
5018static inline bool
5019conf_is_ht40(struct ieee80211_conf *conf)
5020{
Karl Beldan675a0b02013-03-25 16:26:57 +01005021 return conf->chandef.width == NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_40;
Luis R. Rodriguez10c806b2008-12-23 15:58:36 -08005022}
5023
5024static inline bool
5025conf_is_ht(struct ieee80211_conf *conf)
5026{
Rostislav Lisovy041f6072014-04-02 15:31:55 +02005027 return (conf->chandef.width != NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_5) &&
5028 (conf->chandef.width != NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_10) &&
5029 (conf->chandef.width != NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_20_NOHT);
Luis R. Rodriguez10c806b2008-12-23 15:58:36 -08005030}
5031
Johannes Berg2ca27bc2010-09-16 14:58:23 +02005032static inline enum nl80211_iftype
5033ieee80211_iftype_p2p(enum nl80211_iftype type, bool p2p)
5034{
5035 if (p2p) {
5036 switch (type) {
5037 case NL80211_IFTYPE_STATION:
5038 return NL80211_IFTYPE_P2P_CLIENT;
5039 case NL80211_IFTYPE_AP:
5040 return NL80211_IFTYPE_P2P_GO;
5041 default:
5042 break;
5043 }
5044 }
5045 return type;
5046}
5047
5048static inline enum nl80211_iftype
5049ieee80211_vif_type_p2p(struct ieee80211_vif *vif)
5050{
5051 return ieee80211_iftype_p2p(vif->type, vif->p2p);
5052}
5053
Meenakshi Venkataraman615f7b92011-07-08 08:46:22 -07005054void ieee80211_enable_rssi_reports(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5055 int rssi_min_thold,
5056 int rssi_max_thold);
5057
5058void ieee80211_disable_rssi_reports(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
Arik Nemtsov768db342011-09-28 14:12:51 +03005059
Wey-Yi Guy0d8a0a12012-04-20 11:57:00 -07005060/**
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01005061 * ieee80211_ave_rssi - report the average RSSI for the specified interface
Wey-Yi Guy0d8a0a12012-04-20 11:57:00 -07005062 *
5063 * @vif: the specified virtual interface
5064 *
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01005065 * Note: This function assumes that the given vif is valid.
5066 *
5067 * Return: The average RSSI value for the requested interface, or 0 if not
5068 * applicable.
Wey-Yi Guy0d8a0a12012-04-20 11:57:00 -07005069 */
Wey-Yi Guy1dae27f2012-04-13 12:02:57 -07005070int ieee80211_ave_rssi(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
5071
Johannes Bergcd8f7cb2013-01-22 12:34:29 +01005072/**
5073 * ieee80211_report_wowlan_wakeup - report WoWLAN wakeup
5074 * @vif: virtual interface
5075 * @wakeup: wakeup reason(s)
5076 * @gfp: allocation flags
5077 *
5078 * See cfg80211_report_wowlan_wakeup().
5079 */
5080void ieee80211_report_wowlan_wakeup(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5081 struct cfg80211_wowlan_wakeup *wakeup,
5082 gfp_t gfp);
5083
Felix Fietkau06be6b12013-10-14 18:01:00 +02005084/**
5085 * ieee80211_tx_prepare_skb - prepare an 802.11 skb for transmission
5086 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
5087 * @vif: virtual interface
5088 * @skb: frame to be sent from within the driver
5089 * @band: the band to transmit on
5090 * @sta: optional pointer to get the station to send the frame to
5091 *
5092 * Note: must be called under RCU lock
5093 */
5094bool ieee80211_tx_prepare_skb(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5095 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, struct sk_buff *skb,
5096 int band, struct ieee80211_sta **sta);
5097
Felix Fietkaua7022e62013-12-16 21:49:14 +01005098/**
5099 * struct ieee80211_noa_data - holds temporary data for tracking P2P NoA state
5100 *
5101 * @next_tsf: TSF timestamp of the next absent state change
5102 * @has_next_tsf: next absent state change event pending
5103 *
5104 * @absent: descriptor bitmask, set if GO is currently absent
5105 *
5106 * private:
5107 *
5108 * @count: count fields from the NoA descriptors
5109 * @desc: adjusted data from the NoA
5110 */
5111struct ieee80211_noa_data {
5112 u32 next_tsf;
5113 bool has_next_tsf;
5114
5115 u8 absent;
5116
5117 u8 count[IEEE80211_P2P_NOA_DESC_MAX];
5118 struct {
5119 u32 start;
5120 u32 duration;
5121 u32 interval;
5122 } desc[IEEE80211_P2P_NOA_DESC_MAX];
5123};
5124
5125/**
5126 * ieee80211_parse_p2p_noa - initialize NoA tracking data from P2P IE
5127 *
5128 * @attr: P2P NoA IE
5129 * @data: NoA tracking data
5130 * @tsf: current TSF timestamp
5131 *
5132 * Return: number of successfully parsed descriptors
5133 */
5134int ieee80211_parse_p2p_noa(const struct ieee80211_p2p_noa_attr *attr,
5135 struct ieee80211_noa_data *data, u32 tsf);
5136
5137/**
5138 * ieee80211_update_p2p_noa - get next pending P2P GO absent state change
5139 *
5140 * @data: NoA tracking data
5141 * @tsf: current TSF timestamp
5142 */
5143void ieee80211_update_p2p_noa(struct ieee80211_noa_data *data, u32 tsf);
5144
Arik Nemtsovc887f0d32014-06-11 17:18:25 +03005145/**
5146 * ieee80211_tdls_oper - request userspace to perform a TDLS operation
5147 * @vif: virtual interface
5148 * @peer: the peer's destination address
5149 * @oper: the requested TDLS operation
5150 * @reason_code: reason code for the operation, valid for TDLS teardown
5151 * @gfp: allocation flags
5152 *
5153 * See cfg80211_tdls_oper_request().
5154 */
5155void ieee80211_tdls_oper_request(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, const u8 *peer,
5156 enum nl80211_tdls_operation oper,
5157 u16 reason_code, gfp_t gfp);
Andrei Otcheretianskia7f3a762014-10-22 15:22:49 +03005158
5159/**
Liad Kaufmanb6da9112014-11-19 13:47:38 +02005160 * ieee80211_reserve_tid - request to reserve a specific TID
5161 *
5162 * There is sometimes a need (such as in TDLS) for blocking the driver from
5163 * using a specific TID so that the FW can use it for certain operations such
5164 * as sending PTI requests. To make sure that the driver doesn't use that TID,
5165 * this function must be called as it flushes out packets on this TID and marks
5166 * it as blocked, so that any transmit for the station on this TID will be
5167 * redirected to the alternative TID in the same AC.
5168 *
5169 * Note that this function blocks and may call back into the driver, so it
5170 * should be called without driver locks held. Also note this function should
5171 * only be called from the driver's @sta_state callback.
5172 *
5173 * @sta: the station to reserve the TID for
5174 * @tid: the TID to reserve
5175 *
5176 * Returns: 0 on success, else on failure
5177 */
5178int ieee80211_reserve_tid(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u8 tid);
5179
5180/**
5181 * ieee80211_unreserve_tid - request to unreserve a specific TID
5182 *
5183 * Once there is no longer any need for reserving a certain TID, this function
5184 * should be called, and no longer will packets have their TID modified for
5185 * preventing use of this TID in the driver.
5186 *
5187 * Note that this function blocks and acquires a lock, so it should be called
5188 * without driver locks held. Also note this function should only be called
5189 * from the driver's @sta_state callback.
5190 *
5191 * @sta: the station
5192 * @tid: the TID to unreserve
5193 */
5194void ieee80211_unreserve_tid(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u8 tid);
5195
5196/**
Andrei Otcheretianskia7f3a762014-10-22 15:22:49 +03005197 * ieee80211_ie_split - split an IE buffer according to ordering
5198 *
5199 * @ies: the IE buffer
5200 * @ielen: the length of the IE buffer
5201 * @ids: an array with element IDs that are allowed before
5202 * the split
5203 * @n_ids: the size of the element ID array
5204 * @offset: offset where to start splitting in the buffer
5205 *
5206 * This function splits an IE buffer by updating the @offset
5207 * variable to point to the location where the buffer should be
5208 * split.
5209 *
5210 * It assumes that the given IE buffer is well-formed, this
5211 * has to be guaranteed by the caller!
5212 *
5213 * It also assumes that the IEs in the buffer are ordered
5214 * correctly, if not the result of using this function will not
5215 * be ordered correctly either, i.e. it does no reordering.
5216 *
5217 * The function returns the offset where the next part of the
5218 * buffer starts, which may be @ielen if the entire (remainder)
5219 * of the buffer should be used.
5220 */
5221size_t ieee80211_ie_split(const u8 *ies, size_t ielen,
5222 const u8 *ids, int n_ids, size_t offset);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07005223#endif /* MAC80211_H */